JP5465225B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of playing a predetermined game.

  As what is generally known as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a machine that can play a predetermined game such as execution of variable display of identification information such as symbols, such as a pachinko gaming machine. It was.

  Also, in such a gaming machine, when a big hit is made, any one of 4R big hit game, 8R big hit game, 12R big hit game, and 16R big hit game is executed, and during the round games of the fourth and eighth rounds In some cases, an effect suggesting the possibility of whether or not the big hit game state round is further granted (continued) (whether or not the round continues) (Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-5297 A (paragraph numbers 0059 and 0060)

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the final round in which it is determined whether or not a round is further provided with an effect suggesting whether or not an advantageous state is further granted in the big hit gaming state. Since it is executed only in the fourth round, the eighth round, etc., in the gaming state before the round in which such an effect is executed, the player may be interested in the continuation of the big hit gaming state. There was a problem that I could not.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game with respect to an effect suggesting whether or not an advantageous state is further given in an advantageous state. The purpose is to do.

(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a predetermined game (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 200),
A plurality of types of advantageous states (16R normal big hit in FIG. 5, 16R probability variable big hits A to D (FIG. 6) having different advantages for the player according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (big hit determination and big hit type determination, internal lottery) 2R probability variation big hit, big bonus (1), (2), challenge bonus (1), state control means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S73 in FIG. 25) for controlling to any advantageous state , S74, S304 to S307 in FIG. 22, the control unit 110),
During the above-described advantageous state (4th to 16th rounds of 16R probability variation big hit A, first to fourth rounds of 16R probability variation big hits B and C, 5th to 16th round of 16R probability variation big hit B, 5th of 16R probability variation big hit C, 5th ~ Eighth round (a period in which three winnings that can be won in appearance are performed), a period until the number of payouts reaches the first stage, a period until the number of payouts reaches the second stage from the first stage ) Includes a first effect and a second effect that is executed after the first effect, and an advantageous state giving notification for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is further given after the execution. Production means (the production control microcomputer 100, S1905 in FIG. 43, S1974 in FIG. 44, S1974 in FIG. 45) for performing the production (ranked up production in FIGS. 41A to 41D, rank-up production in the fifth embodiment). S9 1～S986, the control unit 120a) and provided with,
The production means is
The first effect (Rank-up level increase effect (level increase effect of level gauge 93) in FIGS. 41A and 41B), level increase interlocking effect (destruction effect of wall 92), the first of the fifth embodiment The production is performed by changing the production state according to the change in the game value (the number of winnings, the number of payouts) obtained in the advantageous state (the number of winnings during the big hit, the number of payouts during the bonus game). Directing means (S972 to S975 in FIG. 45),
The second effect (the rank-up level increase effect (level increase effect of the level gauge 93) in FIG. 41C, the level increase interlock effect (the destruction effect of the wall 92), the second effect of the fifth embodiment), Second effect means (S976- FIG. 45) that changes the effect state from a state based on the effect state changed by the first effect, under conditions different from those of the first effect (operation of the operation button 120). S979).

According to such a configuration, in the advantageous state, when performing the advantageous state giving notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is further given, the magnitude of the game value obtained in the advantageous state is increased. A first effect that changes the effect state according to the change is performed, and after the first effect, the effect state is changed under a condition different from the first effect from a state based on the effect state changed by the first effect. A second effect to be changed is performed. As a result, the second effect as the final effect of the advantageous state imparting notification effect is performed, but the second effect is performed from the state based on the effect state changed by the first effect. Regarding the state grant notification effect, the player may feel that the game at a timing before the timing at which the final effect is executed is also involved in the possibility of whether or not an advantageous state is further given. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), the first effect means limits the change in the effect state in the first effect based on the magnitude of the game value obtained in the advantageous state (FIG. The production is limited so that the level gauge value does not exceed the first upper limit value in S973 of 45).

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect, since the change in the effect state is limited based on the magnitude of the game value obtained in the advantageous state, the effect state changes excessively in the first effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the change in the production state in the second production from being affected.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the first effect means displays the change state of the effect state (rank-up level increase effect (level gauge increase)) in the first effect. In accordance with the level), the possibility of further imparting the advantageous state is notified (FIGS. 41A and 41B ).

According to this configuration, in the first effect, in response to a change status of the effect condition, the possibility of height advantageously condition is further applied is informed, the effect condition in the first effect The interest of the game can be improved based on the changing situation.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the second effect unit is further provided with the advantageous state in the second effect according to a change state of the effect state. After that, the effect mode in the advantageous state is different (when the operation button 120 is operated during the operation effect execution round according to S983 to S985 in FIG. 45, the round effect A is executed in the subsequent rounds, and the operation effect is executed. When no button operation is performed during the round, round effect B is executed in the subsequent rounds.)

  According to such a configuration, in the second effect, the effect state in the advantageous state after the advantageous state is further given differs according to the change state of the effect state, so the effect state in the second effect Based on the changing situation of the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the effect means has a cumulative amount of effect state change (accumulated value of level increase effect) in the advantageous state as a threshold value (first upper limit). When the value reaches (value), an effect is given to notify that the player is more likely to be given the advantageous state (“Maximum level of wall and rank up” message in FIG. 41A). Notification),
In the first effect, the first effect means performs an effect in which the cumulative amount of the change in the effect state corresponding to the increase in the game value obtained in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined value (see FIG. 41B). Thus, an effect is achieved in which the level gauge value reaches the first upper limit value (40) according to the winning).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the player that it is advantageous for the player to further be provided with the advantageous state when the cumulative amount of the change in the advantageous state reaches the threshold value. Sometimes, in the first effect, the effect that the accumulated amount of the change in the effect state corresponding to the increase of the game value obtained in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined value is performed, so the first effect is further provided with the advantageous state Since it is possible to make the player feel that he / she is involved in the effect of notifying that the possibility of being played is advantageous for the player, the interest of the game can be further improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure explaining the characteristic of control of hit type including big hit and small hit in a tabular form. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the hit | chipping classification | category including a big win and a small win, and the opening | release aspect which is an open | release pattern of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows the release mode in the big hit game state of each hit type. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number used by the main board | substrate side. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for big hits, and the variation pattern type determination table for small hits big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the pending | holding storage buffer in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of stage production. It is a figure which shows a prefetch notice determination table in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch notice effect cancellation | release process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of a rank improvement effect. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a rank improvement effect process. It is a block diagram which shows the example of a whole structure of the game system in which the pachinko game machine by 4th Embodiment is included. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a whole process of the game system. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a production | generation of the image of the two-dimensional code displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is a front view which shows the whole structure of the slot machine by 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the control circuit of a slot machine.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a slot machine, which is a gaming machine capable of playing a predetermined game. Any game machine may be used.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of hit type control including big hits and small hits in a table format. FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game area 7, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information for identifying each. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the lower part of the game board 6, there is provided a second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information for identifying each. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small indicator is formed in, for example, a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start for the game ball described later). After passing through the winning opening 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the variable display time (variable time) elapses. The term “game ball passes” means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening and a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) in the prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols that can be identified in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the change display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the change display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) It is stopped, swinging, enlarged, reduced, or deformed in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols may fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol may be switched. Thus, an effect performed in a state in which the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) before the final result is displayed is referred to as a reach effect.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are synchronously changing while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable display areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  In this embodiment, the case where the display of the effect symbol is displayed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9 is shown, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect of displaying the result of the story based on the determination result of the big hit determination or the variation pattern may be executed. For example, perform a battle production where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, and if it is a big hit, perform a victory victory against the game or battle, and if it is off, perform an effect defeating the game or battle. Also good. In addition, for example, instead of displaying the result of winning or losing or the like, it is possible to execute an effect such that a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (the variation display of the effect symbol is performed by a variation pattern command (variation pattern designation command) on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the perceived variation time.)

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won at the second start winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 14 is such that the nails are densely arranged around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first starting prize opening 13 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting prize opening 13. This may be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a total pending storage display unit (display area) that displays the total number (total pending storage count) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. 18c is provided. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In this embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the first hold storage and the second hold storage are displayed side by side in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, It is displayed in a manner capable of recognizing whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue).

  In addition, since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided. Moreover, you may display the total pending | holding memory | storage display part 18c by the same color, without distinguishing the 1st pending | holding memory number and the 2nd pending memory number. In addition, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are displayed in the same color without distinguishing the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, the total reserved memory display unit 18c displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the left and right. You may display in order from the left end or the right end, without distinguishing. In addition, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are distinguished by color, the total reserved memory display unit 18c does not distinguish between the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the left and right sides. Or you may display in order according to the priority of a variable display from a right end.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 corresponding thereto are performed in synchronization. In addition, the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 corresponding thereto are performed in synchronization. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 is made to recall the jackpot. The combination of effect symbols as a specific display result is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change received. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the pattern command. For this reason, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, there is provided a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-ream effect and a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variation display on the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in a specific game state (big hit game state) which is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player that is generated when the is displayed and displayed, It becomes an open state. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  In FIG. 2, the jackpot probability after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state or the small hit for each type of hit in the big hit and the small hit The fluctuation time after the end of the winning gaming state, the number of times of opening (the number of rounds) in the jackpot, and the opening time of each round are shown. As shown in FIG. 2, as the jackpot gaming state with different numbers of rounds, a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states of 16 rounds of jackpot gaming state and 2 rounds of jackpot gaming state are provided. In the small hit, a small hit game state with the same number of times of opening and open time as the two round big hit game state.

  Specifically, in the 16-round big hit game state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be in an open state in a predetermined release mode for each round. In the 16-round big hit gaming state, there are a case where the game is opened only once in each round, and a case where the game is opened only once in a certain round and is opened several times in other rounds. Each round ends when the following end conditions are met.

  For a round that is opened only once in one round, a special variable winning ball for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls is generated from the start of the round. The device 20 is opened. In addition, in a round that is opened multiple times during one round, if there is no predetermined number of winnings before the final opening of the plurality of rounds ends, the final round of opening ends, Alternatively, if there is a predetermined number of winnings before the final opening of the plurality of times is finished, the processing is finished when the winning is made. Then, when the end condition of each round is satisfied, a continuation right is generated, and after a predetermined interval (the big winning opening is temporarily closed), the process proceeds to the next round and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 Is released again. The generation of such a continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches 16 rounds (final round) at which a predetermined upper limit value is reached.

  Further, in the two round big hit game state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be in an open state in an open manner which is more disadvantageous to the player than the 16 round big hit game state. In the two-round jackpot gaming state, the game is opened only once in each round. Each round is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the round, or when a condition for ending the round that a predetermined number (for example, nine) winning balls have occurred is satisfied. The When the end condition of the first round is satisfied, a continuation right is generated. After the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again, the big hit gaming state ends when the end condition of the second round is satisfied.

  In this way, the big hit of 2 rounds is allowed up to the number of times the opening of the big prize opening is less than 16 rounds (2 times in this embodiment), but the opening time of the big winning opening is short (for example, 0 .5 seconds) type of jackpot (type). In the case of the present embodiment, as a big hit of two rounds, the opening time of the grand prize opening is extremely short (0.5 seconds), and substantially a prize ball (a prize ball paid out for the prize), that is, There is a hit where no balls can be obtained.

  In addition, as a big hit of two rounds, it is possible to provide only a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained, or only a hit where a prize ball can be obtained. Both a win and a win from which a prize ball can be obtained may be provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the big hit of 16 rounds, the big hit gaming state continues for 16 rounds, but with respect to the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, a plurality of types of big hits having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided. ing. A plurality of types of 16 round jackpot opening modes will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the “big hit” is controlled to the 16-round or 2-round big hit gaming state, there is a probability that the special gaming state is determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state (the normal gaming state which is not the probability variation state). A type of jackpot (type) that shifts to a high probability state (an abbreviation of a probability variation state, also referred to as a high probability state) is called “probability big hit”. In addition, as a special gaming state, in association with the probability variation state or independently, in a short time state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened from the normal state (non-short-time state) It may be controlled. In this way, when the state shifts to the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so that an effective start winning is likely to occur and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, as the special game state, an electronic tuner that facilitates winning to the variable winning ball device 15 by increasing the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened in association with or independently of the probability changing state. It may be controlled to the support control state. In addition, the special game state may be controlled to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state in association with the probability change state or independently. In addition to the probability change state, the special game state may be controlled to the electric chew support control state in association with the time reduction state, or may be controlled to the electric chew support control state independently of the time reduction state. is there.

  In the case of this embodiment, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, when the special gaming state is controlled to the probability variation state, the case is controlled to the electric chew support control state accompanying the time shortening state, and the time shortening state In some cases, it is not controlled by the electronic chew support control state. In addition, after the big hit gaming state, when it is not controlled to the probability change state and becomes the normal state, it is not controlled to the electric chew support control state. In this embodiment, it is controlled to the electric chew support control state in association with the time shortening state, and when not controlled to the time shortening state, it is not controlled to the electric chew support control state. Is referred to as a time-short state, and when it is not in a time-short state and is not in a time-short state at the time of an electric support, it may be referred to as a non-time-short state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 is open is higher than when the control is not performed. As a result, the game ball is likely to start and win (the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are more likely to satisfy the variable display execution condition). Further, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 14 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 14 is increased by such electric Chu support control (high frequency state) is the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the ratio “base” is higher than when the control is not performed, it is called “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  Furthermore, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to a state in which any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increase control state are combined, You may make it transfer to a high base state. In addition, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to any one of the normal symbol shortening control state, the normal symbol probability changing control state, the opening time extension control state, and the opening number increasing control state, You may make it transfer to a state. As described above, as the electric chew support control, any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increasing control state, any one of a plurality (all) Any control may be performed as long as the control is performed in a combined state or a combined state.

  Also, among the “big hits”, the type (type) of big hits that do not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 16-round or 2-round big hit gaming state is called “normal big hits”.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as a big hit of 16 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits including 16R (R is a symbol indicating a round) normal big hit and 16R probability variable big hits A to D are provided. In addition, as a big hit for two rounds, one type of big hit called 2R probability variable big hit is provided. In addition, as the big hit of two rounds, a plurality of types of big hits having different control states after the big hit gaming state may be provided.

  In the 16R normal big hit, after the big hit gaming state, the control to shift to the probability changing state is not performed, and the control to shift to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state is not performed.

  The 16R probability change big hits A to D are controlled to shift to the probability change state, the time reduction state, and the electric chew support control state after the big hit gaming state is finished, and these control states are until the next big hit occurs. A jackpot that lasts for a period of time. Each of the 16R probability variable big hits A to D differs in the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the big hit gaming state.

  In the 2R probability variation big hit, control to shift to the probability variation state is performed after the big hit gaming state is finished, but the control to shift to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state is not performed, and the probability variation state is generated in the next big hit. It is a big hit that lasts until.

  2R probable big hit is a promising state after the end of the big hit gaming state by opening the big win in a mode with a small number of rounds (2 times) and a very short opening time (opening for 0.5 seconds). When it is informed that it has become, it is possible to make it appear to the player as if it has suddenly become a probable change state, which is also referred to as a “sudden probable big hit”. “Suddenly probable big hit” may be referred to by the abbreviation “surprise big hit” or “surprise”. The 2R probability variation big hit is a hit where a prize ball is not substantially obtained since the half-second opening is performed only twice in the big hit gaming state.

  As described above, when the probability change state is caused by the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the first advantageous state advantageous to the player who becomes the probability variation state, the time shortening state, and the electric chew support control state, and the time shortening There is a second advantage that is advantageous for a player who is not in the state and in the electric chew support control state but is in a probable change state. The first advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the second advantageous state.

  In addition, the hit where virtually no prize ball is obtained is a big hit of 16 rounds, but the prize ball is substantially obtained because the opening time per round is extremely short, for example, 0.1 seconds. It may not be possible. In addition, as a winning where a prize ball is not substantially obtained, a prize ball is substantially obtained by executing at least one of a small number of rounds or a short opening time per round. Anything that doesn't exist. Specifically, for a big hit (similarly for a small hit) for which a prize ball cannot be obtained, the number of times of opening is 2 and the opening time is 0.5 seconds, or the number of times of opening is 16 and the opening time is 0. What is necessary is just to set like 1 second.

  Further, the 16R probability variation big hits A to D and the probability variation state and the short time state as the special game state in the 2R probability variation big hit can be continued until the special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It is good. However, in that case, when the next big hit occurs before the variable display count reaches the predetermined count, the probability variation state and the time reduction state are ended. In other words, in that case, the probability variation state and the short time state over the period until the earlier one of the condition until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times or the condition until the next big hit occurs, whichever comes first Will continue. In such a case, the number of times that the short-time state continues (the number of times the special symbol and the design symbol are changed) may be fixedly set or a plurality of types each time a big hit occurs. May be selected from the number of times (random selection, selection in a predetermined order). Further, the end timing may be different between the probability variation state and the time reduction state. For example, the probability variation state may be continued until the next big hit occurrence, and the short time state may be cut off a number of times, or vice versa.

  In addition, the number of rounds is the same as the big hit, but the number of rounds is the same, such as providing a big hit with an opening pattern with a long opening time and a big hit with an opening pattern with a short opening time. A plurality of patterns with different opening patterns are provided, so that the selection is executed at different selection ratios when the first special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit and when the second special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit. It may be.

  The small hit is a hit in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened with the same number of times and opening time as the 2R probability variable big hit in the gaming state (small hit gaming state) when the small hit is reached. When a small hit is made, after the small hit gaming state, both the big hit probability and the base state are not changed from those before the start of the small hit gaming state.

  Since the 2R probability variable big hit and the small hit are the same as the number of times and the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, whether the 2R probability variable big hit or the small hit is in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state? Is difficult for the player to recognize. Thereby, after the end of the big hit gaming state of 2R probability variation big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state, when a common performance that does not notify that the probability changed state is performed, whether or not it is in the probability changed state. It is difficult for players to recognize. Since such a control state is a state in which the probability variation state is latent, it is referred to as a latent effect state, and control for making such a latent state is referred to as latent effect control. In addition, as 2R probability variation big hit, you may provide what is controlled by electric chew support control without being controlled to a time-short state after the end of big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 does not report that the probability change state is in effect after the end of the big hit gaming state of 2R probability change big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state. The latent control is performed to produce the following. By performing such latent control, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player is in a probable state, and to improve the interest of the game. In this embodiment, an example in which a small hit is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a small hit may not be provided.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are blinked during the game. In the lower part of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is not only provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also provided with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  Note that the operation button 120 is not limited to a button that can be pressed, and may be a button that can be rotated, for example, a rotary selector, or a touch operation or a pressing operation, such as a touch panel. It may be a thing, and the thing which can be tilted like a lever type switch may be sufficient. Further, instead of the operation button 120, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 120 only needs to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 includes an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). ) Is used as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, an effect control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 4) as an effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80, which will be described later, is connected to the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command for instructing the effect contents is received from and the display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying the effect symbol is performed. The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 receives an operation detection signal from the operation button 120 and performs various effects according to the signal.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives signals from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106.

  An operation signal from the operation button 120 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 107. The effect control microcomputer 100 performs various game effects based on operation signals from the operation buttons 120, as will be described later.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, an opening mode in the big hit gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a table showing the relationship between the hit type including the big hit and the small hit and the opening mode (opening number and opening time of each round) which is the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20. In FIG. 5, the total number of rounds in which a lottery is substantially obtained for each hit type is added. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an opening mode in the big hit gaming state of each hit type.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the jackpot gaming state based on “2R probability variation jackpot” (sudden probability variation jackpot), the number of rounds is two, and the opening time of the big winning opening in each round is 0.5 seconds. In the big hit game state, a predetermined number of prize balls will be paid out by winning a game ball at the open big prize opening, but in the 2R probability variable big hit, one open time of the big prize opening is Since it is 0.5 seconds and is extremely short, it is a big hit that a prize ball (out) cannot be obtained. In the small hit gaming state based on “small hit”, the release mode is the same as “2R probability variable big hit”.

  In the jackpot gaming state based on each of “16R normal jackpot” and “16R probability variable jackpot D”, the number of rounds is 16, and the opening time of the big winning opening in each round is 30 seconds (FIG. 6D). In the jackpot gaming state based on these jackpots, since a very short opening time (0.5 seconds) is not set, the total number of rounds in which a prize ball is substantially obtained is 16.

  In the jackpot gaming state based on “16R probability variable jackpot A”, the number of rounds is 16, the opening time in the first to third rounds is 30 seconds, and the opening time in the fourth to 16th rounds is 0.5 seconds ( FIG. 6 (A)). In the big hit gaming state based on “16R probability variable big hit A”, since the extremely short open time (0.5 seconds) is set for 13 rounds, the total number of rounds in which a prize ball can be substantially obtained is three times. . Accordingly, in “16R probability variation big hit A”, as shown in FIG. 6 (A), the big hit gaming state in which the open state in which the game ball can be won in the big hit gaming state is executed three rounds as shown in FIG. It becomes.

  The jackpot gaming state based on “16R probable big hit B” has 16 rounds, the opening time is 30 seconds in each of the first to third rounds, and the fifth to seventh rounds, and the eighth to 16th rounds are opened. The time is 0.5 seconds (FIG. 6B). And in the 4th round, it opens 13 times in 0.5 second. In the big hit gaming state based on “16R probable big hit B”, since the extremely short open time (0.5 seconds) is set for 10 rounds, the total number of rounds in which a prize ball can be substantially obtained is six times. . As a result, in “16R probability variation big hit B”, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), after an open state in which a game ball can be won in the big hit gaming state as seen from the player, three rounds are executed, It becomes a big hit gaming state which is executed after the round.

  The jackpot gaming state based on “16R probability variable jackpot C” has 16 rounds, and the release time in each of the first to third rounds, the fifth to seventh rounds, and the ninth to 16th rounds is 30 seconds. (FIG. 6C). And in each round of the 4th round and the 8th round, it opens 13 times in 0.5 second. In the big hit gaming state based on “16R probable big hit C”, since the extremely short open time (0.5 seconds) is set for two rounds, the total number of rounds in which prize balls can be substantially obtained is 14 times. . As a result, in “16R probability variation big hit C”, as shown in FIG. 6 (C), after a round of the open state in which the game ball can be won in the big hit gaming state as viewed from the player, three more rounds are executed. A round hit game is executed, and then the game is executed 8 times and the game ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 6A to 6C, “16R probability variation big hit B” and “16R probability variation big hit C” are not easily distinguished from “16R probability variation big hit A” in the fourth round. The opening operation in 0.5 seconds is performed for 13 times, which is the same as the total number of opening times in the 4th to 16th rounds in which the opening for 0.5 seconds is performed at “16R probability variation big hit A”. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 6C, “16R probability variation big hit C” is “16R probability variation big hit B” so that it cannot be easily distinguished from “16R probability variation big hit B” in the eighth round. The opening operation in 0.5 seconds is performed over 9 times, which is the same as the total number of times of the 8th to 16th rounds in which the opening is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  In this way, with respect to “16R probability variation big hit A”, “16R probability variation big hit B” and “16R probability variation big hit C” are in a state where they can win in the same operation mode in the first to third rounds, and thereafter the same operation mode Thus, unlike the “16R probability variable big hit A” in which the big hit gaming state is ended after the common operation of being in a state in which it is virtually impossible to win, control is performed in which the winning round continues.

  And, in contrast to “16R probability variation big hit B”, “16R probability variation big hit C” is in a state in which it is possible to win in the same operation mode in rounds 5 to 7, and thereafter, in the same operation mode, in a state where it is substantially impossible to win. Unlike the “16R probability variable big hit B” in which the big hit gaming state is terminated after the common operation is executed, control is performed such that the round in which a winning can be continued further continues.

  As described above, in this embodiment, “16R probability variation big hit A”, “16R probability variation big hit B”, and “16R probability variation big hit C” cannot be won in the first to third rounds in which a prize can be won, and thereafter. In the winning round, control is performed such that the distinction cannot be made based on the operation mode. In addition, “16R probability variation big hit B” and “16R probability variation big hit C” cannot be distinguished by the operation mode even in the fifth to seventh rounds in which a prize can be won, and in the subsequent rounds in which a prize is virtually impossible to win. Control is performed.

  In this embodiment, the following effects are performed for each of “16R probability variation big hit A”, “16R probability variation big hit B”, and “16R probability variation big hit C”. During the period of the first to third rounds, a rank-up indicating whether or not the degree of advantageous for the player may be ranked up by further adding a round of the big hit gaming state as a state advantageous for the player A first effect as an effect is executed. As a specific example of the first effect, as will be described with reference to FIG. 41, an effect (winning effect) in which the effect mode changes in accordance with winning in the big prize opening during the round is performed. Also, during the period of the fifth to seventh rounds, the same first effect is executed as during the period of the first to third rounds.

  Then, during the substantially non-winning period following the first to third rounds (fourth to sixteenth rounds of “16R probability variation big hit A”, each of “16R probability variation big hit B” and “16R probability variation big hit C”) In the fourth round, the second round as a rank-up effect suggesting whether or not the degree of advantageous for the player may be ranked up by giving a round of the big hit gaming state as a state advantageous for the player. Production is performed. The second effect is executed in an effect mode in which the effect state changes from a state based on the effect state changed by the first effect under conditions different from those of the first effect. As a specific example of the second effect, as described with reference to FIG. 41, an effect (operation effect) in which the effect mode changes in accordance with the player's operation during the round is performed. In addition, during the substantially non-winning period following the 5th to 7th rounds (the 8th to 16th rounds of the “16R probability variation big hit B”, the eighth round of the “16R probability variation big hit C”), the same second effect Is executed.

  By executing such a rank-up effect, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the continuation of the round of the big hit gaming state and improve the interest of the game. And, since the rank-up effect is not limited to the period immediately before it is determined whether or not the round continues, it is executed as the first effect in the period before the round, so whether or not the round continues The player's interest can be improved both during the period immediately before the game is confirmed and during the previous round. Furthermore, after the first effect is executed, the second effect as a rank-up effect is an effect mode in which the effect state changes under a condition different from the first effect from the state based on the effect state changed by the first effect. Since it is executed, the interest of the game can be further improved by the relevance of the production content and the changeability of the production content.

  In addition, in 16R probability variation big hits A to C, an example in which a round in which a prize ball is not substantially obtained like the 4th to 16th rounds of 16R probability variation big hit A is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a round in which a prize ball is not substantially obtained as described below may not be provided.

  For example, instead of the 16R probability variation big hit A, a 3R probability variation big hit consisting of only the first to third rounds where a winning ball is substantially obtained is provided. Instead of the 16R probability variation big hit B, a 6R probability variation big hit consisting of only the first to sixth rounds where a winning ball is substantially obtained is provided. Instead of the 16R probability variation big hit C, a 14R probability variation big hit consisting of only the first to twelfth rounds in which a winning ball is substantially obtained is provided. When such a big hit is provided, for example, a predetermined time after the end of the first to third rounds (a 3R probability variable big hit is a big hit end display period, a 6R probability variable big hit and a 14R probability variable big hit is an interval period between three and four rounds) The second effect is executed during a predetermined time after the end of the fourth to sixth rounds (a jackpot end display period for the 6R probability variation big hit and an interval period between the sixth and seventh rounds for the 14R probability variation big hit).

  Alternatively, the first effect may be executed in the first and second rounds, and the second effect may be executed in the third round. Alternatively, the first effect may be executed in the fourth and fifth rounds, and the second effect may be executed in the seventh round.

  As the control data for executing the release control in the big hit game state of various jackpots as described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6 and the release control in the open mode in the small hit game state, an opening pattern data table is provided. Stored in the ROM 54. The release pattern data table data (open pattern data) includes the number of releases (upper limit number of rounds), release time (open time in each round), round release mode (in each round) for each type of big hit and small hit. And the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 including the interval time (inter-round time), and the opening mode as shown in FIG. 5 is executed for each type of big hit and small hit. It is used as data for

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used on the game control board 31 side. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) MR1: A random counter that determines whether or not to make a big hit and whether to make a big hit (for big hit determination).

  (2) MR2: Random counter for determining the type of big hit (16R normal big hit, 16R probability variation big hit A to D, 2R probability variation big hit) (for big hit type determination).

  (3) MR3: a random counter that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type).

  (4) MR4: a random counter that determines a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination).

  (5) MR5: A random counter that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit).

  (6) MR6: a random counter for determining the initial value of MR5 (for determining the MR5 initial value).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types such as 16R normal big hit, 16R probability variable big hit A to D, and 2R probability variable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (MR1), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (MR2). Is selected. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is selected and determined, the jackpot symbol is also selected and determined based on the value of the jackpot type determining random number (MR2). Therefore, MR2 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number. The hit includes a small hit, and the big hit determination random number (MR1) is also used as the small hit determination random number. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number (MR1), the small hit symbol is determined to be a predetermined symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (MR3), and then determined using the variation pattern determination random number (MR4). Is determined as one of the variation patterns included in Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is originally a single variable display corresponding to one reserved memory. Is an abbreviation indicating pseudo continuous variation. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 16R normal big hit and 16R probability big hit AD, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, is used. And normal CA3-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream, and super CA3-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type with super reach. In the case of 2R probable big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1, which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern, and special CA4-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Instead of the hardware random number, a software random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, when the 16R probability variable big hit A to D is reached, the high probability state and the high base state are changed after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, the probability variation state and the high base state continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the 2R probability variable big hit is reached, the game shifts to the high probability state after the big hit game ends, but does not shift to the high base state. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the next big hit occurs.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it is possible to determine the small hit only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and not to provide the small hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect for the probability variation is not performed. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (MR1). If it matches the big hit determination value, it is decided to make a big hit (16R normal big hit, 16R probability variable big hit A to D, 2R probability big hit) for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize opening 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the stored memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b indicate that the jackpot type is determined based on a random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type when the change display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. ”,“ 16R normal big hit ”, and“ 2R probability variation big hit ”.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, compared to the big hit type determination table 131a, the big hit type determination table 131b includes “16R probability variable big hit AD” and “16R normal”. The ratio of the 16 round big hits such as “big hit” is set higher than the 2R round big hit such as “2R probability variable big hit”. Therefore, when the second special symbol is a big hit than the first special symbol, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player with respect to winning the big winning opening.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, compared to the big hit type determination table 131a, in the big hit type determination table 131b, among the 16 round big hits, “16R probability variable big hit AD” is shown. The probability of selecting a big hit for such a probable big hit is set higher than a normal big hit such as “16R normal big hit”. Therefore, when the second special symbol is a big hit than the first special symbol, it is advantageous for the player with respect to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, compared to the big hit type determination table 131a, the big hit type determination table 131b includes, for example, probability change big hits such as “16R probability variable big hits A to D”. The ratio at which a jackpot having a large number of rounds in which a game ball can win a big winning opening, such as the 16R probability variable jackpot D, is selected to be high. Therefore, when the second special symbol is a big hit than the first special symbol, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player with respect to winning the big winning opening.

In the jackpot type determination table of FIGS. 8D and 8E, the ratio of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set higher for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol may be set to have a higher rate of selection of a jackpot advantageous to the player than the second special symbol. Moreover, you may make it set the ratio from which the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol select the jackpot advantageous for a player to the same ratio.
Further, “2R probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “2R probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “2R probability variation big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, a 2R probability variable big hit as a first big win that gives a predetermined amount of game value and a larger amount of game than the game value are shown. In some cases, the 16R probability variable big hit and the 16R normal big hit as the second big hits to which value is given are determined, and the first big hit is made at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Although the case where it determines is shown, the game value provided is not restricted to the number of rounds shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first jackpot, the second jackpot may be determined by increasing the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round as the game value. . Further, for example, as compared to the first jackpot, the second jackpot may be determined by increasing the opening time of the big winning opening per one time during the jackpot as the game value. Also, for example, even for the same 15 rounds of big hit, a first big hit that opens the big prize opening once per round and a second big hit that opens the big prize opening multiple times per round are prepared. The game value of the second jackpot may be increased by substantially increasing the number of times the big winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in the case of either the first jackpot or the second jackpot, when the jackpot is opened 15 times (in this case, all the 15 rounds are completed in the case of the first jackpot) However, in the case of the second jackpot, an undigested round remains), and an effect may be executed in which it is determined whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first jackpot, since all the 15 rounds have been completed internally, the jackpot game is finished, and in the case of the second jackpot, there is an undigested round internally. The jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the jackpot of the 15th opening).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of big hits include “16R probability variable big hits A to D”, “16R normal big hits”, and “2R probability variable big hits”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 16 rounds and two rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game or a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the case where there are six types of jackpot types is shown, but not limited to six types, for example, seven or more types of jackpot types may be provided. Conversely, the number of jackpot types may be less than six, for example, only two types of jackpot types may be provided.

  In addition, “2R probability variation big hit” has a smaller number of times of opening the big winning opening than “16R probability variation big hit AD” and “16R normal big hit” (in this embodiment, the number of times of opening for 0.5 seconds is 2). Jackpots that are allowed up to). In other words, when it becomes “2R probability variation big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in "16R probability variation big hit AD" and "16R normal big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round may be as long as 29 seconds, whereas in "2R probability variation big hit" per round The opening time of the grand prize winning opening is as short as 0.5 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a prize winning opening during the big hit game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.5 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “2R probability variable big hit” is determined. Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “2R probability variation big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of MR2, and the decision values corresponding to “16R probability variation big hit AD”, “16R normal big hit” and “2R probability big hit” ( Big hit type judgment value) is set. When the value of MR2 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern type determination table and a small hit big hit variation pattern type determination table.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (MR3).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern value (MR3) for determining the variation pattern type, and includes normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, super A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “16R normal big hit” and the big hit type are “16R probability variable big hit AD”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 9B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “16R normal big hit” or “16R probability variable big hit A to D probability big hit”, it is used for determining the variation pattern type. If the value of the random number (MR3) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 10R / 2R probability variation big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and super reach In addition, a variation pattern type that does not involve pseudo-continuations is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “2R probability variable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than “2R probability variable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, in the case of controlling to the 2R probability variable big hit state in response to the fluctuation display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “2R probability variable big hit”, the case of controlling to the big hit state by 16R positive variable big hit and 16R normal big hit Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (MR3) for determining a variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of them. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Also, FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (state after the end of the 16R probability variation big hit) in the probability variation state. . FIG. 10D shows a variation pattern type determination table 135D for loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state (a state after the end of 2R probability variation big hit) in the probability variation state. . The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> D have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is an off-design. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of reserved storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type determination table for losing 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3, and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Although the case where two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B used in the case, the method of dividing the variation pattern type determination table for deviation is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. . For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2). For example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used separately for each of the three, the total pending storage number, the four total pending storage number,... Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total pending storage number may be used. For example, a variation pattern type determination table for deviation may be used for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4, and so on.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storage, but a variation pattern for deviation according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of type determination tables may be provided. For example, when the fluctuation display of the first special figure is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory). Fluctuation variation pattern type determination for 0 number, 1 first reserved memory number, 1st reserved memory number 2 pieces, 1st reserved memory number 3 pieces, 1st reserved memory number 4 pieces, etc. Each table may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variation display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation for at least jackpot, such as a variation pattern with super reach, and that can give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) at which a big hit appears when a change display (for example, a change display with super reach) according to the specific production mode is executed. ing. For example, the expected degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined and out of place) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (MR3) for determining the variation pattern type, and includes non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (MR3) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 230-251, it turns out that the variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed irrespective of the total number of reserved storage.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (MR3) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 1 to 79, it will be understood that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo-ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of stored pending. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variation display patterns other than the reach variation display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. This is a variation display pattern (variation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total pending storage number (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), If the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is the high base state, the total number of pending storage is 1 or 2 However (or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 101.

  The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the determination that the variation display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is made. This table is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the random number (MR4) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (MR4) for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the effect symbol is “ Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2 and a special PG 1-2 with a specific effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 55. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A changes the variation display result based on the variation pattern determination random number (MR4) according to the variation pattern type determination result when it is determined that the variation display result is “out of range”. It is a table referred to in order to determine a pattern as one of a plurality of types. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Accordingly, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C08 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control CPU 101 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C08 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C08 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A006 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a jackpot start designation command is used according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of “16R normal jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used.

  In the case of “16R probability variation big hit A”, the big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. In the case of “16R probability variation big hit B”, the big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. In the case of “16R probability variation big hit C”, the big hit start designation command (A004 (H)) is used. In the case of “16R probability variation big hit D”, the big hit start designation command (A005 (H)) is used. In the case of “2R probability variable big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A006 (H)) is used.

  Command A007 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the same fanfare screen as that for the 2R probability variable big hit, that is, designating the start of the small hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for specifying the start of 2R probability variation big hit when it is a 2R probability variation big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command if it is a small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round, the command indicating that the special prize opening is open is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) for opening the big prize opening designating round 1 is transmitted, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The commands A301 (H) to A306 (H) are effect control commands (a jackpot end designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, for ending the jackpot game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by “16R normal jackpot”. The command A302 (H) is used to end the big hit game by “16R probability variable big hit A”. Command A303 (H) is used to end the big hit game by “16R probability variation big hit B”. Command A304 (H) is used to end the big hit game by “16R probability variable big hit C”. Command A305 (H) is used to end the big hit game by “16R probability variable big hit D”. Command A 306 (H) is used to end the big hit game by “2R probability variable big hit”.

  Command A307 (H) is an effect control command for displaying a jackpot end screen common to the 2R probability variable jackpot, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a 2R probability variable big hit end designation command when it is a 2R probability variation big hit, but does not send a small hit end designation designation command when it is a small hit. You may comprise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the command B000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / low base state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state). Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been won is transmitted as the hold storage information, and the total reserved storage number However, the effect control command transmitted as the hold storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small win or not, and a determination result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. It is. The command C6XX (H) indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result (variation category)) in which determination value range is included in the variation pattern type determination random number among the winning determination results. Is an effect control command (variation category command). In addition, in a configuration in which a rank-up effect is performed according to a prize winning in a big prize opening as will be described later, every time a prize is detected by the count switch 23, a big prize opening that designates that the prize is detected. Send a winning designation command.

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 24), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big win, the small win, the big hit type, It is determined in which determination value range the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set, and control for transmission to the effect control CPU 101 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmission to the effect control CPU 101 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and the variable category command. Based on this, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value, the variation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” occurs in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that “16R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that the “16R probability variation big hit A” is obtained, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that “16R probability variation big hit B” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that the “16R probability variation big hit C” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (design 5 designating command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that the “16R probability variation big hit D” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 7 designating command) in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 8 designation command) in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared when setting the symbol designation command and when setting the display result designation command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the start winning prize A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control CPU 101 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number value is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). The values are derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This is the same for the subsequent variation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each variation in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (A) to 9 (D) and FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D). A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state becomes a high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.79. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when performing the process of S232 in the winning effect process described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “16R normal big hit” is obtained at the start winning, in S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, the variation pattern type of the normal CA 3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that one of the “16R probability variation big hits A to D” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 3. It is determined whether it becomes 38 or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit is made at the time of starting winning, in S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. judge. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, at least the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, and super CA3-3 variation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3, a pre-reading notice effect described later is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, the effect is started from the variable display that is started after the start prize (holding storage) for the variable display to be notified is generated, and the start prize (holding) that is the object of the notice effect is held. What is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays before the start of the variable display corresponding to (memory) is executed.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect does not need to be executed over a plurality of fluctuating displays. For example, in the fluctuating display only once before the fluctuating display subject to the notice effect is started. A notice effect may be performed. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is, for example, the notice display effect starting from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. The notice effect may be completed by the above, or the notice effect may be performed over the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In addition, it is not always necessary to continuously execute a plurality of fluctuation displays. For example, a notice effect may be executed in a plurality of fluctuation displays intermittently every other time or every second time.

  As the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice is performed by assuming that the display mode of “pending storage display” becomes a specific display mode, assuming that it is immediately executed at the timing when the start winning for the variable display to be notified is generated. Production may be included. Further, as the pre-reading notice effect, in addition to what is immediately executed at the timing when the start winning for the variable display to be notified is generated, the effect is based on the variable display that is started after the start winning for the variable display to be notified is generated. Things to start with may be included.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether the game is in a high probability state or a high base state and whether or not a big hit game is being played), every time a winning prize is generated, The time determination process is executed, and the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 15 is always transmitted, and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is transmitted. Then, the presentation control CPU 101 executes the pre-reading notice before starting the notice display of the change target based on the received symbol designation command or change category command.

  When the effect control CPU 101 in the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, it is shown in FIG. The display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As a method of sending the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 31 to the production control board 80 one byte at a time using eight parallel signal lines of production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of production control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data take-in process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the effect symbol variation display corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and on the second special symbol display device 8b. The effect parts such as the effect display device 9 that can be used in common with the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol and performs the effect according to the change display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the game, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in the RAM 55” means an area in the RAM 55. As shown in FIG. 18A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 18A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 18 (A), the reserved specific area is “first” or “second” in the order of winning based on winning in the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14. The indicated data is set. Therefore, in the reserved specific area, the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored.

  FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area (holding storage buffer) that stores random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 18B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (MR1) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (MR2) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (MR3). ) And a random number for determining a variation pattern (MR4).

  Based on the winning at the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating a software random number, A process of saving (storing) in the saving area in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first holding storage buffer based on the winning at the first start winning opening 13, and based on the winning at the second starting winning opening 14, Extracted and stored in the second pending storage buffer.

  In this manner, storing the information related to the start winning as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “hold stored”. The random number for determining the variation pattern (MR4) may be extracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol instead of being extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start winning determination process (at the time of starting winning). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (MR4) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  As described later, the data stored in the hold specific area and the storage area as described above is read at the start winning prize and used for the pre-reading notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display. It is done.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 101 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect controls. Pattern data constituting the pattern is stored.

  As an example, in the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the effect control device 9, the speaker 27, the various LEDs 25, 28, the movable member 78, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns used for the purpose is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns including, for example, a special-figure effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  In this embodiment, the special-figure variation effect control pattern is derived from a fixed special symbol that is the special-figure display result after the variation of the special symbol is started in the variation display, corresponding to a plurality of variation patterns. Control contents of various effects operations such as effect display operations such as change display operation of reach design, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc. It consists of data to show. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Among the special-fluctuation effect control patterns, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns with different effect modes in each reach effect may be included for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

FIG. 19A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control pattern.
Each effect control pattern, such as a special control change effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, an effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling various performance operations as described above, and the contents of the various performance controls, the switching timing of the performance control, and the like may be set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating operation control contents and the like in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area 7. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 101. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the production control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined production control command is received from the main board 31 and a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the production operation in the production control CPU 101. In other words, data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 such as data indicating the change mode of the effect symbol during the variable symbol display of the special symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speaker 27, such as data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the like in conjunction with the changing display operation of the effect symbol during the special symbol variable display. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 27. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern that includes some control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 19B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 101 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches one of the production control process timer determination values, the production design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, control for outputting sound from the speaker 27 in a manner specified by the sound control data is performed, and control for blinking a light emitter such as a decoration LED is performed in a manner specified by the lamp control data. In the operation effective period designated by the above, control for receiving the operation on the operation button 120 and determining the content of the effect is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 19B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the change display of the effect symbol An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period for executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during the display of variation of the effect symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets an effect control pattern (special pattern change effect control pattern) based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command, for example, when starting change display of the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 101 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern) when starting execution of a predetermined effect such as a notice effect, for example. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect devices (effect display device 9, speaker 27, various LEDs) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Etc., and the control of the movable member such as the movable member 78 is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 101 to the VDP 109, the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the like. The VDP 109 that receives the instruction from the effect control CPU 101 reads the image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM. Further, in the audio output board 70 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 101, for example, the voice synthesis IC 703 reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit)) (S4), the RAM is made accessible. Set (S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, time reduction flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port) Buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (S43). Further, the CPU 56 gives a display result designation command designating the display result (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. It transmits to (S44). Then, the process proceeds to S14. In S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in S44, the measurement of the saved variable time timer value is resumed, and the special symbol fluctuation display is resumed and saved. When the value of the variable time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). (S13) is transmitted to the sub-board (S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random MR1 for jackpot determination.

  In S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is, for example, a random number for determining a variation pattern type and determining a variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a counter for generating a display random number. This is a process for updating the count value. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability variation big hit, the reach sudden variation symbol (for example, "135") is not reached but reach). May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31.

  As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a start winning determination process (S311). In the start winning determination process, when a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 occurs, various determination processes at the start winning as shown in FIG. 23 are performed. Then, according to the special symbol process flag indicating the internal control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, any one of S300 to S310 is performed.

The processes of S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of the variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result designation command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design confirmation designation is made to the production control microcomputer 100. Control to send a command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to S304.

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing of S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit a special prize opening opening designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S306. Update to the corresponding value (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening opening process, a process for confirming the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is a value corresponding to S307 (this example Then, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a short time flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). To do. Further, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to S310.

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process in S101.
In the start winning determination process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213) and sets the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S1214). In addition, the CPU 56 adds the total number of reserved storage counters in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 described in FIG. Data indicating “first” is set in the area corresponding to the value of (S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on. When the second start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  As shown in FIG. 18A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the 2 start winning opening 14. Therefore, the winning order to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 is stored in the hold memory specifying information storage area (hold specifying area).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 18B) ( S1216). In the process of S1216, the big hit determination random number (MR1), the big hit type determination random number (MR2), the variation pattern type determination random number (MR3), and the variation pattern determination random number (MR4) are extracted and stored. Stored in Note that the variation pattern determining random number (MR4) is not extracted in the start winning determination process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but may be extracted at the start of the variation of the first special figure. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (MR4) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning presentation process in which a variation display result and a variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is executed is determined in advance at the starting winning (S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 101 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S1218), and performs control to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 101 (S1219). ). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 101 (S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter in the EXT data to effect the total pending storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the CPU 101 is performed (S1221).

  By executing the processing of S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state), the CPU 56 Every time a start winning is made in the first start winning opening 13, both the symbol designating command and the variation category command are always transmitted to the effect control CPU 101.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs by executing the processing of S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the first start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is on (S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1224), and sets the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 18B) (see FIG. 18B). S1227). In the processing of S1227, the jackpot determining random number (MR1), the jackpot type determining random number (MR2), the variation pattern type determining random number (MR3), and the variation pattern determining random number (MR4) are extracted and stored. Stored in Note that the variation pattern determining random number (MR4) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start winning determination process (at the start winning), but may be extracted at the start of the variation of the second special figure. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (MR4) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 101 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S1229), and performs control to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 101 (S1230). ). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 101 (S1231), sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data, and controls the total pending storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the CPU 101 is performed (S1232).

  By executing the processing of S1229 and S1230, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state), the CPU 56 Every time a start winning is made in the second start winning opening 14, both the symbol designating command and the variation category command are always transmitted to the effect control CPU 101.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the second start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in S1217 and S1228 in the start winning determination process.

  In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (MR1) extracted in S1216 or S1227 in the start winning determination processing with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. Then, it is confirmed whether or not they match (S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 and before the display of variation based on the start winning is started, By performing the effect process at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the jackpot or the jackpot is reached, and in which judgment value range the value of the jackpot type or the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and, as will be described later, by the effect control CPU 101 based on the determination result at the time of winning. A pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be given during the variation display of the effect symbol is executed.

  If the big hit determination random number (MR1) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in S220), the CPU 56 is in a high probability state (probability change state, high probability / high base state and high probability) in which the gaming state is a probability change state. It is checked whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the probability / low base state is included is set (S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (MR1) extracted in S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays may be executed after confirming whether or not the state of probability variation has been made in S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display based on the start winning is actually started. is there. For this reason, the game state has changed between the time when the winning prize is confirmed in S221 and when the fluctuation display based on the starting prize is actually started (for example, before the start of fluctuation). 16R probability variation big hits A to D, or 2R probability variation big hits, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see S61 to be described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change of the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (MR1) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (MR1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227, and FIGS. ) Is compared with the small hit determination value shown in FIG. 4 to confirm whether or not they match (S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing at S1217), the CPU 56 determines a small hit determination table (first special determination table) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for (for symbol). Further, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 62 (when the winning effect processing at S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the set small hit determination value.

  If the big hit determination random number (MR1) does not match the small hit determination value (N in S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating that it is “out of” in the symbol designation command. (S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for determining the current gaming state (S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state in S225 (specifically, whether or not a high probability flag and a short time flag are set). )). It should be noted that there are a plurality of periods between the time when the start winning is confirmed and whether the high probability state and the high base state are confirmed in S225 until the start of the variable display based on the start winning. May be displayed. For this reason, the game state is not changed from the confirmation of whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are established in S225 at the time of starting winning until the start of the variable display based on the starting winning. (For example, when 16R probability variation big hits A to D or 2R probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, there is a case where the normal state is changed to the probability variation state.). Therefore, the gaming state determined in S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see S61 to be described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change of the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of S225 (S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 is determined.

  For example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is less than or equal to the threshold value 219 in S232, which will be described later. It is determined that “08 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is less than or equal to the threshold value 79 in S232, which will be described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). It is determined that “0A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the threshold value 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 are set regardless of the total number of pending storage. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is less than or equal to the threshold value 79 in S232, which will be described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). It is determined that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (MR1) matches the small hit determination value (Y in S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in S 232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (MR1) matches the jackpot determination value in S220 or S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (MR2) extracted in S1216 and S1227 (S229). ). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first special) shown in FIG. It is determined whether the big hit type is “16R probability variable big hit AD”, “16R normal big hit”, or “2R probability variable big hit” using the symbol 131a. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at S1228 is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown in FIG. 8E. Is used to determine whether the big hit type is “16R probability variable big hit AD”, “16R normal big hit”, or “2R probability variable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “16R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “16R normal big hit” to the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “16R normal big hit A” is reached, the CPU 56 selects any one of EXT data “02 (H)” to “06 (H)” indicating that “16R normal big hit A to D”. Is set in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “07 (H)” indicating “2R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by S229 (S231).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines “16R normal big hit”, the threshold values 74 and 149 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is less than or equal to the threshold value 74 in S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 74 (that is, 1 to 74). It is determined that “10 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines any of “16R probability variation big hits A to D”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is less than or equal to the threshold value 38 in S232, which will be described later. It is determined that “13 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “2R probability variation big hit”, it sets the threshold value 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in S232, which will be described later. It is determined that “16 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for determining the variation pattern type (MR3) extracted in S1216 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is any of the determination values. It is determined whether the range is reached (S232).

  In S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In S232, the set variation pattern type determination table is set. May be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type is to be used.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10 (10”) as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 according to which variation pattern type is determined in S232. H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”is set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, the case has been shown in which it is determined in which range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range even if it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the winning determination. When it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is made, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, although the production control CPU 101 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type, the variation category command is shown to be one of the big hit variation pattern types. On the basis of the fact that the pre-reading notice effect described later may be executed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process.

  In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control CPU 101 is performed (S51A), and the process is terminated.

  For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In S51, the CPU 56 does not confirm the value of the total number of reserved storage, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the specific storage area. If it is determined that there is no hold storage, the process may proceed to S51A.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 17A) is data indicating “first”. (S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process is performed for the second special symbol (S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  By executing the processing of S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  Further, in the case where the display is performed with priority given to the variation display of the second special symbol, the value of the jackpot determination random number (MR1) is set to the jackpot determination value in the low probability state in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. It is possible to execute only the process of comparing with, and not to compare with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, execute only the process of S220 and do not perform the processes of S221 and S222). It may be) With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Are stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In addition, the CPU 56 corresponds to the current gaming state among gaming state designation commands such as a low probability / low base state designation command, a high probability / high base state designation command, and a high probability / low base state designation command. Control is performed to transmit the game state designation command to the effect control CPU 101 (S60). In this case, the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base state is set (in this embodiment, since the electric-chu support control state is associated with the time reduction state, the time reduction flag If the short time flag indicating that the high base state is set) is set, a control for transmitting a high probability / high base state designation command is performed. When the high probability flag is set and the time reduction flag is not set, control is performed to transmit a high probability / low base state designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the short time flag is set, control for transmitting a low probability / low base state designation command is performed.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control CPU 101, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the effect control command is executed in the order of the gaming state designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interruption. It is transmitted to the CPU 101 for effect control. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, a gaming state designation command is transmitted, a variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, a display result designation command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, and another 4 ms elapses A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is sent later. When the special symbol variation starts, symbol variation designation commands (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) are also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is produced at the same timer interruption as the variation pattern command. It is transmitted to the control CPU 101.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S320 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads MR1 (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1216 or S1227 of the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining the big hit or the small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state). When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When the game state is the normal state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (MR1) matches any one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. When it is determined to be a big hit (S61), the process proceeds to S71. Deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but also to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol .

  Whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not a high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “16R probability variation big hit AD”, “16R normal variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (MR1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). The small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (MR1) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (S63), and proceeds to S75.

  If the value of MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to S75 as it is.

  In S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value of the random number (MR2) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“16R probability variation big hit AD”). , “16R normal jackpot” or “2R probability variable jackpot”) is determined as the jackpot type (S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the big hit type determination random number (MR2) extracted in S1216 and S1227 of the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and determines the big hit type. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which 2R probability variation big hit is selected is high.

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “16R normal jackpot”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “16R probability variable big hit A”, “02” is set as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “16R probability variation big hit B”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “16R probability variation big hit C”, “04” is set as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “16R probability variation big hit D”, “05” is set as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “2R probability variable big hit”, “06” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “2”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”, which becomes a big hit symbol, according to the determination result of the big hit type Is determined to be a special symbol stop symbol. That is, when the jackpot type is determined as “16R normal jackpot”, “1” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the jackpot type is determined as “2R normal jackpot”, “2” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “16R probability variation big hit A” is determined, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “16R probability variation big hit B” is determined, “5” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “16R probability variation big hit C” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “16R probability variation big hit D” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “4” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining a big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process.

  In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (S94). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the short time flag indicating the high base state is set (S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “16R probability variation big hit AD”, “16R normal variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Also, after the big hit game ends, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state (probability variation state) is set (S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in S96), that is, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability / low base state), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Confirm (S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types (see FIG. 10 (A)) is selected (S98). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135B for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. (See FIG. 10B) is selected (S99). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used for the selection, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (S100). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is not controlled). Therefore, if the time-short flag is set, it is in a high probability / high base state), and the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for losing as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. The table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (S101). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of S95 to S101, the variation pattern for loss shown in FIG. The type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of S102 described later. When the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process is performed as a variation pattern in the process of S105. The non-reach PA1-2 of the shortening variation is determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, a change display of the shortened variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is the high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The shortening variation display may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total reserved memory number is substantially zero. The table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the MR3 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of S92, S94, S98, S99, S100 or S101. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (S102).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in S102, the CPU 56 is a hit variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B (see FIG. 11) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. , One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (S103). Also, MR4 (variation pattern determination random number) is read from the random number buffer area (first reservation storage buffer or second reservation storage buffer), and a plurality of change patterns are obtained by referring to the change pattern determination table selected in the process of S103. One of the types is determined (S105). When the MR4 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 sets the value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (MR4). May be directly extracted, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 101 (S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 101 (S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a non-reach variation pattern type determination table (including non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 variation pattern types shown in FIG. 10) and a reach variation pattern type determination table (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach is set so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” in the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table. By determining whether or not to reach, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In consideration of a decrease in the execution ratio of the notice effect, as shown in this embodiment, the “reach out of super reach” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. It is preferable to pre-determine whether or not “non-reach” will occur and perform a pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). When data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and data indicating “second” is displayed in the special symbol pointer. If it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 8b is terminated. In the special symbol display control process of S32, the display of the special symbol is terminated with reference to the process state of the special symbol process instead of ending the variation display of the special symbol with reference to the end flag. You may do it.

  Further, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S132). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set (S133). When the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S146 described later.

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the set flag among the high probability flag and the short time flag (S134), and transmits a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. (S135). Specifically, if the type of jackpot is 16R normal jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot A, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot B, a jackpot start 3 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot C, a jackpot start 4 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot D, a jackpot start 5 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is 2R probability variation jackpot, a jackpot start 6 designation command is transmitted.

  In S135, the type of jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state (low probability / low base state) designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S136).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time for notifying that the jackpot has occurred in the effect display device 9 when the jackpot is generated is set in the jackpot control timer for managing the control time in the jackpot game state (S137). ). Further, in order to count the number of rounds of the big hit with reference to the open pattern data (see FIG. 5) stored in the ROM 54 according to the big hit type specified by the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55. The number of rounds is set in the counter for counting the number of rounds (for example, 16 times for 16R normal big hit and 16R normal big hit AD), and 2 times for 2R probability big hit (S138A). Then, an open count counter during round as a counter for counting the number of releases during one round is set to an initial value (0 times) (S138B). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winning opening opening process (S305) (S139), and the process is terminated.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133 described above, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S146). When the small hit flag is not set, the display result is out of order, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S147), and the process is terminated. .

  When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S148A).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying that the small hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the special winning opening control timer (S148B). Also, with reference to the small hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the opening used for counting and managing the number of times the big winning opening is opened in the small hit pre-release process (S308) and the small hit opening process (S309). The number of times of opening (2 times) is set in the number counter (S148C). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S308) (S148D), and the process is terminated. Thus, after that, the small hitting opening pre-processing (S308) and the small hitting releasing process (S309) are executed, so that in the small hitting gaming state, the big winning opening is 2 in the same manner as the big hit gaming state of 2R probability variation big hitting. Will be released once.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for a special winning opening in the special symbol process (S305). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process proceeds to S411.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 controls to drive the solenoid 21 to open the big prize opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) (S403). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open counter during round is 0 (S404). When the value of the number-of-opens counter in the round is 0, it means that the current time is before the round is released.

  When the value of the open count counter during round is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of rounds matches the open round determination value a plurality of times (S405A). As described above, when the big hit type is either 16R probability variable big hit B or C, there is a round in which the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times in one round (multiple open round). In S405A, it is determined whether or not the next round corresponds to the multiple open round. More specifically, in S405A, when the big hit type specified by the data of the big hit type buffer is, for example, 16R probability variable big hit B, whether the next round is the fourth round (the value of the counter for counting the round number is round) Whether or not the determination value is “13”) is determined. In S405A, if the big hit type specified by the big hit type buffer is 16R probability variable big hit C, whether the next round is the fourth round (the value of the round count counter is the round determination value “13”). It is determined whether or not the next round is the eighth round (the value of the counter for counting the number of rounds is a round determination value “7”).

  When the value of the counter for counting the number of rounds coincides with the open round determination value in multiple times in S405A, the number of open times set for each round in which multiple rounds are opened according to the big hit type for executing the multiple rounds is being rounded. The release number counter is set (S405B). Specifically, in S405B, when the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit B, “13” is set in the open count counter during the next round in the fourth round. In S405B, when the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit C, “13” is set in the open count counter during the next round, and “9” is round when the next round is the eighth round. Set to the middle open count counter.

  On the other hand, if the value of the counter for counting the number of rounds does not coincide with the open round determination value multiple times in S405A, 1 is set in the open count counter during round (S405C). This is because the number of times of opening is one in rounds other than the multiple opening round.

  After the process of S405B or S405C, the value of the counter for counting the number of rounds is decremented by 1 (S405D). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a special winning opening opening designation command (A1XX (H)) for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the special winning opening (during round) to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S405E), the process proceeds to S406. The CPU 56 recognizes the current number of rounds by checking the value of the round number counting counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game.

  If the value of the number-of-opens counter during the round is not 0 in S404, it means that the current time is not before the start of the round, but when the closing period between the opening of a plurality of big prizes during the round has ended. Therefore, the processing of S405A to S405E is not executed, and the process proceeds to S406.

  Next, in S406, based on the opening pattern data corresponding to the type of jackpot, the CPU 56 makes a big winning opening corresponding to the maximum winning opening time (large winning opening opening time) to the big winning opening control timer. An opening time is set (S406). The big winning opening opening time is set with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 according to the big hit type specified by the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55. In S406, as the big winning opening opening time, 0.5 seconds or 30 seconds is set according to the type of the big hit, the number of rounds (the value of the counter for counting the number of rounds), and the value of the opening number counter during the round.

  Specifically, all rounds of 16R normal jackpot, first to third rounds in 16R probability variation jackpot A, first to third rounds in 16R probability variation jackpot B, fifth to seventh rounds, first to first rounds in 16R regular jackpot C In all the rounds, rounds 5 to 7, rounds 9 to 16, and 16R probability variation jackpot D, 30 seconds is set as the opening time for the big prize opening.

  In all rounds of 2R probability variation jackpots, 4th to 16th rounds in 16R probability variation jackpot A, 4th round in 8R probability variation jackpot B, 8th to 16th rounds, 4th round in C and 16R probability variation jackpot C, and 8th round , 0.5 seconds is set to the opening time of the big prize opening.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (S306) (S407).

  When proceeding to S411, is the CPU 56 closed during a round (between the first and second releases or between the second and third releases in a multiple-release round)? It is confirmed whether or not (S411). Here, when it is not closing during a round, it is when it is the interval period between rounds.

  If it is not closed during the round in S411, the process ends. Thereby, at the start of the big hit gaming state, until the value of the big prize opening control timer becomes 0, the big hit display time set as described above is reached, and control for notifying that a big hit has occurred is performed.

  On the other hand, if the count is closed during S411, the CPU 56 checks whether the count switch 23 is turned on (S412). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by 1 (S413). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 9) (S414). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number, the process proceeds to S436 (see FIG. 29) in the large winning opening opening process described later.

  If the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number in S414, 1 may be set in the big winning opening control timer, and then the process may proceed to S407. In this case, when 1 is set in the special prize opening control timer, the value of the special prize opening control timer immediately becomes 0 in the special prize opening opening process shown in FIG. 29 (see S420 and S421), and the round is determined. Processing for terminating is executed.

  In the process of S411, the CPU 56 can determine whether or not it is closed during the round depending on whether or not the value of the open counter during the round is 0. When the value of the number counter is set to −1, a flag indicating the closing during the round is set when the value of the opening counter during the round is not 0, and whether the closing is in the round based on the flag in the process of S411 It may be determined whether or not. In that case, the flag is reset when shifting to the special winning opening opening process.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by one (S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 9) (S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S422 may be reversed.

  When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the big winning opening (S435). Then, the process proceeds to S436.

  On the other hand, when the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 in S421 (S421), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the big prize opening (S422). Next, the value of the open count counter during the round is decremented by 1 (S423). When the value of the number-of-opens counter during the round becomes 0 (S424), it means that the opening of all the big winning openings in the round is completed, and the process proceeds to S436. On the other hand, if the value of the number-of-opens counter during the round is not 0 (S424), a value corresponding to the closing time (closing time during the round) between the multiple winning openings in one round is a big prize. The mouth control timer is set (S425). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (step S441).

  When proceeding to S436, the CPU 56 clears the value of the winning number counter (sets it to 0). Further, the value of the open counter during round is reset to 0 (S437).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the value of the round number counting counter (S438). When the value of the counter for counting the number of rounds is not 0, the CPU 56 designates a post-big prize opening designation command (A2XX () for designating a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed). H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S439).

  Then, a value corresponding to the interval time from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer (S440). Specifically, the jackpot type is confirmed based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55. The interval time is set with reference to the open pattern data stored in the ROM 54 in accordance with the jackpot type specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55. Specifically, the interval period is basically 5 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of 2R probability variation big hit and between rounds in which the opening time of the big winning opening in 16R big hit is 0.5 seconds, the period is shorter (for example, 0.5 seconds). As a result, during the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the interval time is set until the value of the big prize opening control timer becomes 0, or control for producing an effect predetermined for the interval time is performed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (S305) (S441).

  When the value of the number-of-releases counter is 0, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a big hit end command corresponding to the big hit type to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S442). Specifically, the jackpot type is confirmed based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55. When the jackpot type is 16R normal jackpot, a jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot A, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is 16R probability variation big hit B, a big hit end 3 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is 16R probability variation big hit C, the big hit end 4 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is 16R probability variation big hit D, a big hit end 5 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot, a jackpot end 6 designation command is transmitted.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time for notifying the effect display device 9 that the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot control timer (S443), and sets the special symbol process flag. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S307) (S444), and the process ends.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the big prize winning control timer (S151). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (S152). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has elapsed, the big hit flag is reset (S153). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of jackpot to be finished corresponds to any of 16R probability variation jackpots A to D and 2R probability variation jackpot (S154).

  In S154, when the big hit is not the type of big hit as described above, after the big hit gaming state, it is a big hit (16R normal big hit) that is not controlled to the probability change state and is not controlled to the short-time state or the electric support support control state. The process proceeds to S160 without setting the flag and the time reduction flag.

  On the other hand, since the big hits of the types determined in S154 are all probable big hits, if they are big hits of these types, the high probability flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the probable state (S155).

  Next, it is checked whether or not the type of jackpot to be finished corresponds to any of 16R probability variation jackpots A to D among these types of jackpots (S156). The 16R probability variable big hits A to D are controlled to the probability variable state, and are the big hits controlled to the time shortening state and the electric support support control state. Therefore, if any of the 16R probability variable big hits A to D is met, the hourly flag is set. (S157). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability / high base state designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S158), and proceeds to S160.

  On the other hand, when none of the 16R probability variation big hits A to D corresponds to S156, the 2R probability variation big hit is controlled according to the erasing method, and the 2R probability variation big hit is controlled to the probability variation state, but is controlled to the time reduction state and the electric support support control state. In the big hit end process, the time reduction flag is not set. Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability / low base state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S159), and proceeds to S160.

  In S160, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S170), and ends the process.

  In S154 and S156 described above, the jackpot type is confirmed based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55.

  As described above, when the high probability / high base state is entered, and when the high probability / low base state is entered, the gaming state designation command for designating these states is transmitted, so that the production control microcomputer 100 Can recognize whether the gaming state is in a high probability / low base state, a high probability / low base state, or a high probability / high base state, so different effects depending on the type of gaming state Can be performed.

  Although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the small hit release pre-processing in S308 is the same as the processing executed when the 2R probability variable big hit is performed in the big hit release pre-processing in S305. The processing is the same as the processing executed when the 2R probability change big hit is performed in the big hit release processing of S306, and the small hit end processing of S310 is the same as the processing executed when the 2R probability change big hit is executed in S307. By executing these processes, in the small hit gaming state, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened in the same opening pattern as the big hit gaming state at the time of 2R probability variable big hit. . In the small hitting end process, the high probability flag and the short time flag are not set.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 80 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process.

  In the effect control board 80, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 101 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 31 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S501), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 80. Register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S502). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S502; No), the process of S502 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

  On the side of the production control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 31 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is, for example, an interruption that occurs when an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 101 automatically sets the interrupt prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77 among the input ports included in the I / O. Take in. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in an effect control buffer setting unit in a RAM mounted on the effect control board 80, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in S502 (S502; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (S503), and command analysis processing is executed (S504). In the command analysis process executed in S504, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read out and then read out. Settings and control corresponding to the production control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in S504, the effect control process is executed (S505). In the effect control process of S505, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9, an audio output operation from the speaker 27, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the frame LED 28 and the decorative LED 25, and an effect model. The control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation is determined, determined, set, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 31 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of S505, an effect random number update process is executed (S506), and effects that are counted by a random counter of the effect control counter setting unit provided in the RAM as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating the random number for use is updated by software. The effect control CPU 101 uses SR1-1 (for left effect symbol determination), SR1-2 (for medium effect symbol determination), SR1-3 (right effect effect) used to determine the display result of the effect symbols as effect random numbers. Design) is used. Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines, as the effect random number, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice and the selection of the effect mode (stage (effect scene)) when the pre-reading notice is executed. Various random numbers for production such as are used.

  By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 transmits the effect display device 9, various LEDs 25, 28, etc. according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. By controlling the various lamps and the effect devices such as the speaker 27, various effect controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  For example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped. The fluctuation display is controlled so as to be executed at a fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command. In addition, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined based on the display result designation command to determine whether it is a loss or a big hit, and the type of the big hit when the big hit is determined, and the display of the effect symbol as described above is performed. It is determined using production random numbers (SR1-1, SR1-2, SR1-3) for determining the result.

  For example, in the case of big hits such as “16R probability variable big hits A to D” and “16R normal big hits”, a big hit display result (display result of a doublet) determined in advance corresponding to the big hit type is determined. . Further, when “2R probability variation big hit” or “small hit” is selected, a chance that is a combination of symbols other than the big hit symbol combination is determined as a display result. Further, in the case of losing, the combination of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that do not become rough is randomly determined as the detachment display result. However, if the variation pattern command is a command that specifies that the reach is out of reach, it is possible to form a reach design in which the left and right symbols are aligned during the change display, and the movable display result is determined. When the variation pattern command is a command that specifies that the reach pattern is not reached (usually change), the display result is determined so as not to form a reach design in which the left and right symbols are aligned during the variation display.

  When normal reach is specified in the variation pattern command, reach effects corresponding to each type of normal reach are performed. Furthermore, when super reach is designated in the variation pattern command, reach effects corresponding to each type of super reach are performed.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process (S504) in the effect control main process shown in FIG.

  In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 101 first receives the command received from the main board 31 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (S511). At this time, if there is no received command (S511; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in S511 (S511; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined what command the reception command is as follows. For example, it is determined whether or not the received command is any symbol designation command (S512). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in S511 (S512; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is any variable category command (S513). If the received command is not a variable category command in S513 (S513; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first start winning designation command (S514). If the received command is not the first start winning designation command in S514 (S514; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second start winning designation command (S515). If the received command is not the second start winning designation command in S515 (S515; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a combined pending storage number designation command (S516). If the received command is not the combined pending storage number designation command in S516, settings are made according to other received commands (S518), and the process returns to S511.

  If it is determined in S512 to S516 that the command is a corresponding command, the received command is stored at the head of the free area in the start winning received command buffer as follows (S517), and the process returns to S511.

  If the effect control command received in S512 is any of the symbol designation commands, the received symbol designation command is first stored in the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM mounted on the effect control board 80. It stores in the area for the symbol designation command in the area (S517). Further, if the effect control command received in S513 is any variation category command, the received variation category command is stored in which the latest symbol designation command is stored in each storage area of the start winning reception command buffer. This is stored in the area for the variable category command in the area (S517). However, if a variation category command, start winning designation command, or total pending memory number designation command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored, it will vary within the current timer interrupt. This means that the symbol designating command to be received before the category command has been missed. In this case, the received variable category command is stored in the variable category command area in the first free storage area of the start winning reception command buffer (S517).

  If the effect control command received in S514 is the first start winning designation command, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first start winning designation command in a plurality of storage areas provided in the start winning reception command buffer. Are stored in the start winning designation command area in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored (S517).

  If the effect control command received in S515 is the second start winning designation command, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second start winning designation command in a plurality of storage areas provided in the start winning reception command buffer. Are stored in the start winning designation command area in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored (S517).

  If the effect control command received in S516 is a combined pending storage number designation command, the received combined pending storage number designation command is updated to the latest symbol designation command among the plurality of storage areas provided in the start winning reception command buffer, and The data is stored in the area for the total pending storage number designation command in the storage area where the variable category command is stored (S517).

  In this embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a starting prize is generated are comprehensively expressed, Say. Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designation command which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning presentation process at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 24), the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  In addition, when the start winning is generated, based on the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3, etc., the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit”, The determination result, the design designation command that is an effect control command for designating the determination result of the variation category, and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When storing the received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the received command buffer at the start winning prize, the received command is a design designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command, or a total reserved memory number designation command. The received command may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area. When receiving each received command separately, the storage area of the received received command is blank, and only some effect control commands to be received as one set are excessively stored.

  In such a command analysis process, when a command is received, a command reception flag capable of specifying the received command is set for use in effect control as will be described later, if necessary. The command reception flag set in this way is reset as appropriate when it is no longer necessary in effect control.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S505) in the effect control main process shown in FIG.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 101 executes a prefetch notice determination process (S811) and a prefetch effect release process (S812), which are executed by determining the presence / absence of the prefetch notice effect and the effect mode. . Specific processing contents of the prefetch notice determination process and the prefetch effect cancellation process will be described later.

  In the effect control process, after executing the pre-read effect canceling process, for example, any one of S800 to S807 is performed according to the value of the effect control process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit or the like of the RAM. . In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect symbol variation display is realized, but the control related to the effect symbol variation display synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command reception flag that is set in the command analysis process when a variation pattern command is received is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation display of the effect symbol is started. Further, the stop symbol (display result) of the effect symbol is determined based on the random number value for determining the stop symbol. At the start of the variation display, the timing of the variation display time timer that measures the variation time of the variation display executed in response to the received variation pattern command is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors whether or not the variation time counted by the variation display time timer has ended. Then, based on the fact that the fluctuation time has ended or that an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop is received, the value of the effect control process flag is effected to end the variable display. It is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Control to stop the variation display of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) of the variation display. When the big hit display result is obtained, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804). Update to a value corresponding to (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received in the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the variation display of the effect symbol is started by the effect symbol variation start process, and the symbol confirmation designation command is performed in the effect symbol variation process. Is received, the change display of the effect symbol is stopped by the effect symbol change start process. The fluctuation display is controlled so as to be executed at a fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command. In addition, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined based on the display result designation command in the effect symbol variation start processing, whether it is out of play, big hit or small hit, and big hit when the big hit This is determined based on the type discrimination.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, the display result of the effect symbol variation display is determined as follows. When 16R normal big hit and 16R probability variable big hit A to D, the combination of the big hit symbols with the left, middle, and right production symbols aligned is determined as the big hit display result of the production symbols. For example, when the 16R normal big hit is obtained, the big hit symbol combination is determined as a big hit symbol combination such as “4”. Further, when the 16R probability variation big hits A to D are reached, for example, odd numbers such as “7” are determined as combinations of big hit symbols.

  In this way, by distinguishing between the 16R normal big hit and the 16R probability variable big hits A to D based on the display results of the even numbers and the odd numbers, it is easy to distinguish whether or not it is the probability big hit. Can be. Further, when the 16R normal big hit, the odd symbol combination may be selected and determined as the big hit display result, and when the 16R probability variable big hit A to D, the even symbol combination may be determined as the big hit display result. Alternatively, the combination of even symbols may be selected and determined as a jackpot display result when the 16R normal jackpot is reached, and the combination of even symbols or odd symbols may be determined as the jackpot display result when the 16R probability variation jackpot A to D is reached.

  Further, when the 2R probability variable big hit is made, a chance that is a combination of symbols other than the big hit symbol combination is determined as a big hit symbol combination. Note that the chance item to be displayed when the 2R probability variation big hit may be selected and determined from a plurality of types of chance items. Further, when a small hit is made, the chance is determined as a combination of small hit symbols as in the case of the 2R probability variable big hit.

  On the other hand, when it is out of place, the combination of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that do not become rough is determined at random as the display result. However, if the variation pattern command is a command that specifies that the reach is out of reach, it is possible to form a reach design in which the left and right symbols are aligned during the change display, and the movable display result is determined. When the variation pattern command is a command that specifies that the reach pattern is not reached (usually change), the display result is determined so as not to form a reach design in which the left and right symbols are aligned during the variation display.

  In addition, whether or not to make a big hit in addition to the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it is possible to specify the type of big hit, information on whether or not to make a big hit specified by the fluctuation pattern command, And based on the information of the type of jackpot, you may make it determine the combination of the stop symbol of an effect symbol.

  When normal reach is designated in the variation pattern command, reach production corresponding to each type of normal reach is performed in the production symbol variation processing. Further, when the super reach is designated in the change pattern command, the reach effect corresponding to each type of super reach is performed in the effect symbol changing process.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, a low probability / low base state designation command and a high probability / high base state designation command as a gaming state designation command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 560 by command analysis processing. Based on the high probability / low base state designation command or the like, data specifying what state the gaming state is is stored, and the gaming state is always recognized based on the stored data. Then, based on the recognized gaming state and the variation pattern command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 560, the presentation control microcomputer 100 performs the present gaming state by the presentation control process. It is possible to execute the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect mode according to the.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, the above-described latent effect control is performed as follows in the effect control process. When the big hit end 7 designation command indicating the end of the 2R probability variable big hit is received and when the small hit designation command indicating the end of the small hit is received, in the effect control process processing, at the end of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state At the end of each, the latent effect flag is set until the next big hit ends. Then, while the latent effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not notify whether or not it is in the probability variation state, and whether or not it is in the probability variation state such as displaying a common background image. The latent effect is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition to such an example in which such a latent effect is continued for a period until the next big hit occurs, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, etc.) of variable display (various display of special symbols and effect symbols) is executed. You may make it continue for the period until this.

  Next, a stage effect executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. In the effect control microcomputer 100, as the pre-reading notice effect, the effect scene (hereinafter referred to as the stage) that is the effect mode is switched (shifted) in order to remind the player that the game state has changed. Production is performed. The effect that displays the stage is called a stage effect. In the present embodiment, there are provided a normal stage selected in a normal performance state where no pre-reading notice is performed and a special stage selected as a pre-reading notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, an example of performing a stage effect using a background image is shown as an example of a stage effect. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls to the normal stage state in which the first background image is selected and displayed in the normal effect state in which the pre-reading notice is not performed, and the second background in the effect state in which the pre-reading notice is executed. Control to a special stage state where an image is selected and displayed. As the special stage, for example, a plurality of special stages such as a first special stage and a second special stage are provided, and one of the special stages is selected at a selection ratio as described later.

  Note that the special stage is not limited to selecting from a plurality of special stages, and only one special stage may be used. Further, as described above, the stage may be selected from the normal stage and the special stage that are set as different stages only in the background image. In addition to the different background images, or if the background images are different. Stages with different types of characters to be displayed, stages with different types of effects to be displayed, stages with different display modes such as the shape and color of characters to be displayed, shapes and colors of effects to be displayed, etc. Any effect state may be used as long as the effect state can be distinguished by the effect mode, such as a stage with a different display mode.

  Further, the special stage may be changed at a predetermined stage in accordance with the degree of advantage for the player about the reserved storage information that is the target of the prefetch notice during the period of the special stage. For example, during the execution period of the special stage, the special stage type is “special stage A → special stage B → special stage C” each time the effect symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (one or more times). In this way, the special stage can be changed in stages from A to C as the reserved memory information subject to the pre-reading notice becomes more advantageous to the player. Also good.

FIG. 34 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of the stage effect in the effect display device 9.
Referring to FIG. 34, when it is not determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect, a background image (for example, a mountain landscape image) for the normal stage as shown in (A) is displayed. When it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice, control is performed to shift from the normal stage to the special stage (either the first special stage or the second special stage), as shown in (B). A background image for the special stage is displayed (for example, the first special stage is an ocean landscape image and the second special stage is a space landscape image).

  When the state shifts to the special stage state, as shown in (C), until the background of the special stage is displayed in a manner as indicated by an arrow on the background image, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and at least five variations are displayed. Is a transition prohibition period in which transition to the normal stage is prohibited, and prefetching notice cancellation prohibition control is performed in which transition to the normal stage is prohibited.

  After the transition display is executed five times after the transition to the special stage state, the transition prohibition period to the normal stage ends, and the special stage returns to the normal stage according to the operation of the operation button 120. The prefetch notice cancellation control for canceling the prefetch notice is performed. As the pre-reading notice release control, the operation of the operation button 120 is in a state where it can be accepted, and from the special stage according to the operation of the operation button 120 such as “return to the normal stage when the button is pressed” as shown in FIG. The pre-reading notice effect canceling operation notification is performed by returning to the normal stage, that is, by displaying a message image 90 indicating that the pre-reading notice effect canceling operation can be performed.

  Then, when the pre-reading notice effect can be canceled in this way, when the operation button 120 is pressed, the stage shifts from the special stage to the normal stage according to the operation, as shown in (E). Control is performed.

  In this way, the special stage based on the pre-reading notice effect can be released according to the player's operation, so whether or not to continue the special stage that continues over a plurality of fluctuation displays based on the player's intention. Can be controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 35 shows a prefetch notice determination table, which is a data table used to make a decision (hereinafter referred to as prefetch notice determination) for determining the presence or absence of execution and a notice display mode at the time of execution of the prefetch notice effect. It is a figure shown in a format.

  The pre-reading notice determination table includes the extracted value of the random number SR2 for prefetching notice determination (which can take 100 values from 0 to 99), the presence / absence of the notice, and the display mode (not notice (from the normal stage) This is a data table in which the relationship with each of the first special stage (with pre-reading notice) and the second special stage (with pre-reading notice) is set, and is stored in the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80. ing.

  In the look-ahead notice determination table shown in FIG. 35, the new hold memory information, that is, the big hit / small hit determination result (determination result in the winning effect process) for the hold storage information to be notified this time, The value of the random number SR2 for selecting each of the first special stage (with a pre-reading notice) and the second special stage (with a pre-reading notice) is assigned. For example, in the present embodiment, the determination result is that the winning ball such as 16R normal big hit and 16R probability variable big hits A to D can be obtained substantially, and the winning ball such as 2R probability big hit is substantially winning balls. A big hit, a small hit, and a loss that cannot be obtained are assigned, and for each, a value of a pre-reading notice random number SR2 for selecting the aspect of the notice effect is assigned.

  Further, in FIG. 35, in order to clarify the selection ratio based on the pre-reading notice determination random number SR2, the set random number SR2 for selecting each of the no special notice, the first special stage, and the second special stage is set. (For example, 20, 30, 50...). For example, for 16R normal big hit and 16R probability variable big hits A to D, 20 values are set as the random number SR2 for selecting no notice, and 30 values are set as the random number SR2 for selecting the first special stage. 50 values are set as the random number SR2 for selecting the second special stage.

  In the case where the determination results are divided in this way, the magnitude relationship of the advantage for the player is based on whether or not a winning ball is obtained and whether or not the probability variation state is obtained, and the 16R normal big hit and 16R probability variation. Big hit A to D> 2R probability variation big hit> small hit> out of relationship.

  For the 16R normal big hit and the 16R probability variable big hits A to D, an example in which the value of the random number SR2 for holding storage advance notice determination is collectively shown is not limited to this, but the 16R normal big hit and For the 16R probability variation big hits A to D, the value of the random number SR2 for determining the reserved storage determination notice may be individually set. Further, the value of the random number SR2 for determining the pending storage advance notice may be set in a lump sum including the 2R probability variable big hit in the 16R normal big hit and the 16R probability variable big hit AD. Further, since the small hit is different from the big hit, the value of the pre-reading notice random number SR2 may be set collectively for the loss and the small hit.

  In FIG. 35, for 16R normal big hit and 16R probability big hit A to D, the ratio determined to execute the pre-reading notice is higher than in the case of 2R probability big hit, small hit and out, and the read ahead Data is set so that the ratio of selecting the second special stage is high when the advance notice is executed.

  In FIG. 35, the 2R probability variation big hit has a higher ratio of being determined to execute the pre-reading notice as compared with the small hit and the off-line, and the second special stage is selected when the pre-reading notice is executed. Data is set so that the ratio is high.

  In FIG. 35, with respect to the small hit, the proportion determined to execute the pre-reading notice is higher than that in the case of a loss, and the ratio of selecting the second special stage is high when the pre-reading notice is executed. Data is set.

  By using such a pre-reading notice determination table, any one of the first special stage (with a pre-reading notice) and the second special stage (with a pre-reading notice) is selected for the prefetch notice. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice, and to select and determine the advance notice display mode when the prefetch notice is executed.

  The prefetch notice determination table includes a first determination table for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch notice, and a notice of the prefetch notice when it is determined to execute the prefetch notice by the first determination table. You may provide the 2nd determination table which selects and determines a display mode.

  By the data setting as described above, the proportion of the pre-reading notice that is executed, that is, the ratio that the effect of shifting to the special stage is performed, is that the determination result that the new reserved storage information to be noticed is more advantageous to the player. Get higher. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved based on performing the shift to the special stage as a pre-reading notice. Further, when the preliminarily stored information for the advance notice is a determination result that is more advantageous to the player, the pre-read notice effect, that is, the effect that shifts to the special stage is executed. The rate of transition to the 2 special stage is increased. Thereby, the interest of the player can be further improved based on the pre-reading notice, that is, the execution to the special stage.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice determination process (S811) in the effect control process. In the prefetch notice determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not at least one of the commands transmitted at the time of starting winning is newly received (S851). Specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one of a design designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command, or a combined pending storage number designation command is newly stored in the start prize command storage area. Can be confirmed. If no command is newly received, the process is terminated.

  If at least one of the commands transmitted at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that a pre-reading notice effect (special stage effect) is already being executed. Is set or not (S852). Note that the pre-reading notice execution flag is set in S857 described later. If the pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the process ends.

  Note that, by executing the process of S857, in this embodiment, a new prefetching notice effect determination process is executed on condition that the prefetching notice effect is not being executed. Since the pre-reading notice execution flag is already set after starting the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the pre-reading notice effect determination process again. The

  If the pre-reading notice execution flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 acquires data of the prefetching notice determination table shown in FIG. 35 (S853). Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the pre-reading notice determination random number SR2, and uses the pre-reading notice determination table acquired in S853 to determine the extracted value of the random number SR2 and the determination result of the reserved storage information to be notified (16R normal) Whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed based on the big hit, 16R probability changing big hit A to D, 2R probability changing big hit, small hit, or disengagement, and the presentation mode (first special stage, second) (Special stage) is determined (S854).

  Then, based on the determination result in S854, it is determined whether or not it has been determined to execute the prefetch notice (S855). When it is determined that the decision to execute the pre-reading notice is made, the predecessor notice effect is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the effect mode (first special stage or second special stage) in the effect display device 9. (S856). Then, a pre-reading notice canceling flag indicating that the prefetching notice effect is being executed is set to an on state (S857), and a prefetching notice release restriction counter for managing a period for restricting execution of the prefetch notice release control. Is set to “5” (S858), and the prefetch notice determination process is terminated. In the prefetch notice cancellation limit counter, a variable display count (“5”) prohibiting the release of the prefetch notice effect is set. This prohibits the release of the pre-reading notice effect, that is, the special stage state effect, for the number of variable displays set in the pre-reading notice release restriction counter.

  In this embodiment, an example of performing a stage effect of shifting from the normal stage to the special stage is shown as a pre-reading notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and stage effects that shift from the normal stage to the special stage are, for example, when the display result of the variable display to be executed is a predetermined display result such as the jackpot display result when executing the variable display You may make it carry out.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the example which performs the stage effect which transfers to a special stage from a normal stage was shown as a prefetch notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and stage effects that shift from the normal stage to the special stage are, for example, when the display result of the variable display to be executed becomes a predetermined display result such as the jackpot display result when executing the variable display. You may make it carry out. Further, the stage effect that shifts from the normal stage to the special stage may be performed when the display number of the variable display is counted and the big hit display result does not occur for the predetermined variable display number.

  Further, the stage effect that shifts from the normal stage to the special stage may be performed when the number of times of variable display is counted and the reach state does not occur for a predetermined number of times of variable display. Further, the stage effect that shifts from the normal stage to the special stage may be performed when the elapsed time from the start of the game is measured and the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time.

  As described above, the stage effect that shifts from the normal stage to the special stage is based on the look-ahead determination result, the jackpot determination result at the start of variable display, the variation pattern determination result at the start of variable display, the number of variable displays, or the game time, etc. As long as it is executed on condition that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. In addition, the conditions for performing the stage effect for transitioning from the normal stage to the special stage are established by internal control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are set so that the player cannot participate in the establishment by a selection operation or the like. Yes.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the prefetching notice effect cancellation process (S812) in the effect control process.

  In the prefetching notice cancellation process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the prefetching notice execution flag is set in order to determine whether or not the prefetching notice is being executed (S861). If the pre-reading notice execution flag is not set in S861, the prefetching notice effect canceling process is terminated. As described above, when the pre-reading notice is not being executed, the pre-reading notice effect canceling process is not substantially executed. On the other hand, when the pre-reading advance notice execution flag is set in S861, in order to determine whether or not it is during the period for restricting the execution of the pre-read advance notice release control, the pre-read advance notice release restriction counter of the pre-read advance notice effect is determined. It is confirmed whether the value of “0” is “0” (S862).

  If the value of the prefetching notice cancellation limit counter is not “0” in S862, the prefetching notice effect cancellation process is terminated. As described above, when the value of the prefetching advance notice release restriction counter is not “0”, the prefetching advance notice release control is not executed because the execution of the prefetch advance notice release control is limited. On the other hand, when the value of the prefetching advance notice cancellation restriction counter is “0” in S862, it means that the period during which execution of the prefetching advance notice release control is restricted has ended, and the prefetching advance notice effect cancellation operation enable notification flag is set. By confirming whether or not it is being performed, it is confirmed whether or not the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation enabling notification is being executed (S863). The pre-reading notice effect canceling operation enable notification flag is set in S869 described later when the prefetching notice effect canceling operation enable notification is executed.

  When the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation possible notification flag is set in S863, the process proceeds to S864 described later. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation enable notification is not being executed in S863, it is checked whether or not a pre-reading notice release permission flag indicating that the prefetching notice effect release is permitted is set (S867). The pre-reading notice release permission flag is set in S873 of the notice effect setting process in FIG. 39 executed in the effect symbol change start process in FIG. 38, and in S875 when it is determined to execute the stage transition notice to be executed during the change display. Set.

  If the prefetching notice release permission flag is not set in S867, the prefetching notice effect cancellation process is terminated because the release of the prefetch notice effect is not allowed. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice cancelation permission flag is set in S867, since the prefetching notice effect cancellation is permitted, a pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation enable notification as shown in FIG. 34D is executed (S868). ). Then, a pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation possibility notification flag is set (S869). Thereby, it is shown that the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation possibility notification is being executed. Then, the prefetching notice release permission flag is reset (S869), and the prefetching notice effect release process is ended.

  When the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation enable notification is being executed in S863, the pre-reading notice effect cancellation is permitted, so that it is based on whether or not an operation signal (operation detection signal) from the operation button 120 is input. Then, it is confirmed whether or not there is an operation for canceling the pre-reading notice effect (S864). When there is no operation for canceling the prefetching notice effect in S864, the prefetching notice effect canceling process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an operation for canceling the pre-reading notice effect in S864, the pre-reading notice effect is canceled in the effect display device 9 by executing the effect of shifting from the image display of the special stage being executed to the image display of the normal stage. (S865). As a result, control for shifting from the special stage state to the normal stage state is performed in a manner as shown in FIGS. Then, the pre-reading notice execution flag is reset (S866), and the prefetching notice effect cancellation processing is terminated.

  As described above, when the notice of the pre-reading notice effect canceling operation is notified through S863 to S865, the player's intention is confirmed based on whether or not the operation button 120 is operated, and the pre-reading notice effect is canceled and the special effect is canceled. Since control for shifting from the stage state to the normal stage state is performed, the player's intention can be reflected in the determination as to whether or not the special stage state can be continued, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that no operation signal (operation detection signal) is input within the predetermined period after performing the pre-reading notice effect canceling operation notification indicating that the operation button 120 is not operated within the predetermined period and returning to the normal stage from the special stage. Sometimes, control for canceling the pre-reading notice effect may be performed, and the player's intention when canceling the pre-reading notice effect may be confirmed based on whether or not the operating means has been operated.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which it is determined whether or not an operating means such as the operation button 120 has been operated in order to confirm the player's intention when canceling the pre-reading notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other examples of means for confirming the player's intention may be other intention confirmation means as shown below.

  For example, after providing a motion detection device that can image a player and detect the player's motion based on image processing, and performing a pre-reading notice effect canceling operation notification requesting a predetermined end motion by the player, The player's intention may be confirmed based on whether or not the player has finished the game.

  In addition, a voice processing device that can confirm the player's intention based on the process of analyzing the player's voice is provided, and a pre-reading notice effect canceling operation that requests a predetermined end voice (sound for instructing the end) from the player is possible. After performing the notification, the player's intention may be confirmed based on whether or not the player has issued an end sound.

  In addition, a process of receiving data (for example, data based on an infrared signal) transmitted in response to an operation of a portable terminal device (for example, a mobile phone) owned by a player and detecting an operation mode in the portable terminal device may be performed. An operation data processing device that can perform the pre-reading notice effect canceling operation notification requesting data transmission in response to a predetermined operation of the portable terminal device (operation for instructing the end of the pre-reading notice) is provided, and then the player determines the predetermined operation data processing device. The player's intention may be confirmed based on whether or not data corresponding to the operation is transmitted (received).

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays is executed is used as a condition for restricting the release (end) of the pre-reading notice for performing the transition to the special stage. However, not limited to this, the condition for restricting the cancellation (termination) of such pre-reading notice is to measure the elapsed time from the start of special stage production, and the elapsed time is over a predetermined time. You may make it use the conditions until it becomes.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation display result is determined to be off (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. Note that whether or not it is determined to be out of play may be confirmed based on a change pattern command that can specify whether or not to make a big hit. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 uses the predetermined error symbol determination data table to determine a stop symbol that does not become a reach of the effect symbol ( The process proceeds to S604) and S616. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols. In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and extracted using the detachable symbol determination data table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100. The symbols corresponding to the numerical data thus determined are determined as combinations of stop symbols that result in the variation display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reach symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with a combination of accidental jackpot symbols, it is corrected so as to be a combination of outlier symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by one symbol). In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally reached, it is corrected so that it becomes a combination of non-reach off symbols (for example, correction by shifting the right symbol by one symbol) and each stop symbol. Is determined.

  When it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (S605). The process proceeds to S616. In the process of S605, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is extracted using the loss symbol determination data table. A symbol corresponding to a random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is determined as a stop symbol of the middle symbol, which is determined as a stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state. In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  If it is not determined to be off (S601), the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the winning symbol combination according to the type of the big hit (S603), and proceeds to S616. .

In S603, the winning symbol combination is determined according to the winning type as follows.
The effect control CPU 101 determines the 16R normal big hit, 16R probability big hit A ~ based on which display result designation command among the display result 2 designation command to display result 7 designation command is stored in the display result specific command storage area. The hit type is determined from D, 2R probability variation big hit, and small hit.

  When it is determined that the 16R probability variation big hits A to D have been decided, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and probability variation big hit symbols (for example, left, Use the data table (probability variable big hit symbol determination table) in which the relationship between the middle and right is an odd combination of odd numbers such as “7, 7, 7”, etc. The combination of is selected and determined. When it is determined that it is not decided to make 16R normal jackpot, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, middle) , Using the data table (ordinary jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship to the right is a combination of even numbers such as “4, 4, 4”, etc. Select and determine combinations. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  When the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the 2R probability variable big hit is determined, the chance symbol combination is used by using the chance symbol design table (for example, the left, middle and right are “1”. , 2, 3 ") is selected and determined. In the chance eye symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of types of chance eye symbol combinations. When determining a chance symbol combination, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is extracted from the SR-1 using the chance symbol determination table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining whether or not a notice effect such as a jackpot notice to be executed for each variable display is executed and for determining a notice effect pattern for execution and setting the notice effect. (S616). The details of the notice effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns (S617). In S617, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol in accordance with the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the various effect control (effect operations) patterns specified by the notice effect pattern determined in the process of S616, and the like. Of the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the control pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as a use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80, for example, the effect in the period from the start of the change of the effect symbol until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The control contents of various effect operations such as the effect symbol display operation in the display area of the display device 9, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream or slip effect, and the effect display operation in the notice effect are shown. A plurality of types of data are stored as symbol variation control patterns.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series. As the symbol variation control pattern table, a symbol control pattern table composed of control data for controlling the effect operation of the effect symbol, and a control for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect different from the effect operation of the effect symbol By providing a notice control pattern table made up of data and using a combination of control data for controlling the effect operation of these effect symbols and control data for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect, one symbol variation You may comprise so that the production | presentation operation | movement similar to the case where the production | presentation operation of a symbol and the production | presentation operation of a notice may be performed with a control pattern table.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 (S618). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  When the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of S619, the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Then, the control of the various lamps as the production component and the speaker 27 as the production component is started (S620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of the light emitters such as various LEDs. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802). A variation start process is executed (S622). Then, the effect symbol variation start process ends.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the notice effect setting process (S616) in the effect symbol variation start process.

  In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the prefetch notice execution flag is set in order to determine whether or not the prefetch notice is being executed (S871). When the pre-reading advance notice execution flag is set in S871, whether the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation enable notification flag is set to determine whether or not the pre-read advance notice release operation enable notification is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not (S872).

  When the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation enable notification flag is set in S872, the notice effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect canceling operation enable notification flag is not set in S863, whether or not to execute the stage transition notice effect for notifying that the stage shifts from the special stage to the normal stage in the next variable display to be executed. A stage transition advance notice execution determination process is performed to determine whether or not (S873). In the stage transition notice execution determination process, the value of the random number SR3 for effect for determining the notice effect is extracted, and a data table in which data indicating whether or not to execute the stage notice effect is assigned to each value of SR3, Based on the extracted value of SR3, it is determined whether or not to execute the stage transition notice effect at a rate of about ½. As described above, whether or not to execute the stage transition notice effect is determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display to be executed is a big hit or not. Data indicating the determination result in the stage transition advance notice execution determination process is stored in a predetermined storage area for use in determining the effect control pattern in S617.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the decision to execute the stage transition notice effect has been made in S873 (S874). If it is not determined in S874 to execute the stage transition notice effect, the notice effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S874 to execute the stage transition advance notice effect, the prefetch notice release permission flag is set (S875), and the advance notice effect setting process ends. As a result, when the pre-reading notice cancellation permission flag is set, as described above, it is permitted to perform control to shift from the special stage to the normal stage according to the operation of the operation button 120. In this way, when executing the variable display, whether or not to execute the stage transition advance notice is determined in S873 even if the result of the variable display becomes a big hit or not, and the decision to execute the stage advance notice effect is made. Then, the pre-reading notice cancellation is permitted in S875.

  If the pre-reading notice execution flag is not set in S871, the process for selecting other notice effects other than the stage transition notice is performed (S876), and the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, as an example of the case where it is decided to execute the stage transition advance notice in the variable display as a condition for permitting the transition from the special stage to the normal stage by canceling (ending) the prefetch notice. Indicated. However, a condition for allowing the transition from the special stage to the normal stage after canceling (ending) the pre-reading notice is as follows: The pre-reading notice may be canceled (terminated) unconditionally to allow the transition from the special stage to the normal stage. That is, for example, when the period for restricting the execution of the pre-read notice cancellation control after the transition to the special stage ends, the pre-read is performed according to the operation of the operation button 120 of the player without requiring other conditions. The advance notice may be canceled (terminated) to shift to the normal stage.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect symbol variation stop process is executed when the condition that the variation time monitored using the variation display time timer has ended or the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command is received is satisfied. The It should be noted that the processing may be advanced to the effect symbol variation process only when the condition that the variation time monitored using the variation display time timer has been satisfied is satisfied. Further, the processing may be advanced to the effect symbol changing process only when the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command is received is satisfied.

  In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (S731). If the condition control process is executed when the condition that the variable time monitored using the variable display time timer is satisfied is established, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 are not connected. In order to prevent the recognition of the end timing of the variable display from shifting, it is desirable to execute the process of S731 when the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command is received is satisfied. If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to 732. In this embodiment, when a combination of a big hit symbol or a combination of a small hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of a production symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in S734 which will be described later. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and thus the process proceeds to S735.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (S732). Then, as a stop symbol, check whether a combination of symbols corresponding to normal big hit, probability variation big hit A to D, 2R probability variation big hit, or small hit is displayed (that is, whether it is big hit or small hit) (S733). When the big hit or the small hit is not reached, the CPU 101 for effect control proceeds to S741.

  In S741, it is checked whether or not a pre-reading notice execution flag is set to determine whether or not a pre-reading notice is being executed (S741). When the pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the prefetching notice cancellation limit counter is decremented by -1 (S742). Thereby, every time the variable display is executed, the prefetch advance notice cancellation limit counter is subtracted and updated. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the prefetching notice cancellation limit counter is not subtracted. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S743), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the big hit or the big hit, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (S734), and receives a big hit start designation command reception flag (big hit start 1) indicating that any big hit start designation command has been received. It is checked whether a small hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a designated command reception flag to big hit start 7 designation command reception flag) or a small hit start designation command has been received is set (S735). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (S736). Then, a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect is selected (S737).

  As shown in S858 in FIG. 36, S861 to S866 in FIG. 37, and S741 and S742 in FIG. 40, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed as a special stage effect, the end condition for ending the special stage being executed is as follows. Even if the player's intention to end is confirmed, since it is prohibited to be established during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, there is no inconvenience that the pre-reading notice effect ends in the middle. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game that may occur.

  As shown in S858 in FIG. 36, S861 to S866 in FIG. 37, and S741 and S742 in FIG. 40, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed as a special stage effect, the end condition for ending the special stage being executed is as follows. Even if the player's intention to end is confirmed, since it is prohibited to be established during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, there is no inconvenience that the pre-reading notice effect ends in the middle. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game that may occur.

  The effect control CPU 101 resets a set flag of the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit start designation command reception flag. In the process of S737, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table such as a fanfare effect corresponding to the hit type. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S738), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data) In accordance with 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps as the effect part, the speaker 27 as the effect part, etc.) is executed (S739). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S740) (S890).

  Next, an example of a rank-up effect performed for each of “16R probability variation big hit A”, “16R probability variation big hit B”, and “16R probability variation big hit C” will be described. FIG. 41 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of a rank-up effect in the effect display device 9.

  Referring to FIG. 41, in the rank-up effect, as the effect image, the character 91 acts to destroy the wall 92, and if the wall 92 is destroyed, a round in which a game ball can be substantially won is given thereafter. If the wall 92 is not destroyed, an image that produces an effect in a story in which a round in which a game ball can be substantially won is not subsequently given (continued) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, in the first round, the effect display device 9 displays a level gauge 93 indicating the destructive power level of the wall 92 by the character 91 in addition to the character 91 and the wall 92. Then, a message image 94 “The wall is destroyed and the rank is increased at the maximum level” is displayed. The message by the message image 94 has a meaning that “when the destructive power level indicated by the level gauge 93 is maximized, the character 91 destroys the wall 92 and the round continues and the big hit gaming state is ranked up”. The level gauge 93 can display a level in a plurality of stages from 0 to 50 by a bar graph-like image.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and 41 (B), in the first to third rounds, the level of the level gauge 93 is increased each time a game ball is won in the big winning opening and is detected by the count switch 23. Increases from level 0 by 2 levels. For example, if nine game balls are won, the level increases to level 18. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, in the period of the first to third rounds, the character 91 performs a destructive action in conjunction with the increase in the level display on the level gauge 93 according to the winning. Then, an image in which the destructive force of the wall 92 increases is displayed. Such a period of the first to third rounds is called a winning effect execution period, and the first effect suggesting the possibility of ranking up based on winning in the big prize opening as a rank-up effect. Is the period during which In such a prize production execution period, the production state changes according to the prize winning to the big prize opening, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced according to the prize winning to the big prize opening. In the first effect of the rank-up effect, the level display color of the level gauge 93 (the color of the level displayed for each winning prize) is selected from a plurality of colors, and the prize is substantially awarded after the rank-up effect. When possible rounds continue, the selection ratio of the second level display color (for example, red) is higher than the first level display color (for example, blue). When such a round does not continue, the second level display color (for example, red) Alternatively, the level display color may be selected and displayed so that the selection ratio of the first level display color (for example, blue) becomes higher. In this way, depending on what color the increasing level display color is, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation to rank up (continue the round), and to increase the player's expectation Can be increased.

  In the fourth round, the 16R probability variation big hit A is performed by the opening / closing operation once in each of the rounds 4 to 16, and the 16R probability variation big hit B, C is caused by the multiple opening / closing operations in the fourth round. As described above, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a manner in which it is substantially impossible to win, and in the effect display device 9, the number of rounds is not displayed. Such a period is called an operation effect execution period, and is a period during which a second effect that suggests whether or not to rank up based on the operation of the operation button 120 is executed as a rank-up effect. In such an operation effect execution period, the effect changes according to the operation of the operation button 120, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced according to the operation of the operation button 120. In such an operation effect execution period, the number of rounds is not displayed, and the big prize opening is opened and closed in a manner that makes it virtually impossible to win, so the internal control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 recognizes multiple rounds or one round. The player feels like an interval period between rounds where the operation of the operation button 120 is accepted.

  In the operation effect execution period, as shown in FIG. 41C, a message image 95 “Press the button to destroy” is displayed. The message by the message image 95 indicates that “if the operation button 120 is pressed repeatedly, the level of destructive force at the level gauge 93 increases and the wall 92 can be destroyed”. In addition to the message image 95, an icon image that suggests the operation of the operation button 120 may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (C), when the operation button 120 is operated during the operation effect execution period, the level of the level gauge 93 increases by one level every time the operation button 120 is operated (for example, twice). Display is performed. In the operation effect execution period, as shown in FIG. 41C, the character 91 further performs a destructive action in conjunction with an increase in the level display on the level gauge 93 according to the operation, and the wall 92 is destroyed. An image of increasing force is displayed. In the second effect of the rank-up effect, the level display color of the level gauge 93 (the color of the level displayed every time it is operated) is selected from a plurality of colors, and substantially after the rank-up effect. When the winning round continues, the selection ratio of the second level display color (for example, red) is higher than the first level display color (for example, blue). When such a round does not continue, the second level display color (for example, red) The level display color may be selected and displayed such that the selection ratio of the first level display color (for example, blue) is higher than that of the first level display color. In this way, depending on what color the increasing level display color is, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation to rank up (continue the round), and to increase the player's expectation Can be increased. In this way, the effect that suggests the expectation level that the substantially winning round can be continued by the level display color may be performed only in the first effect in the rank-up effect, or performed only in the second effect. You may make it carry out, and you may make it perform in both the 1st production and the 2nd production.

  During the round of 16R probability variation big hits B and C, the level of the level gauge 93 increases in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120 during the operation effect execution period, and as shown in FIG. When the level (50) is reached, an image in which the wall 92 is completely destroyed by the destruction operation of the character 91 is displayed. Then, when the predetermined rank-up presence / absence notification timing comes after the wall 92 is completely destroyed, messages “success” and “continue round” are displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 96 is displayed, and a rank-up notification is executed indicating that the game state round is further given and the degree of advantage for the player is ranked up. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the round continues further when such a rank-up notification is made.

  On the other hand, during the round of 16R probability variation big hit A, the level of the level gauge 93 increases according to the operation of the operation button 120 in the operation effect execution period, but does not reach the maximum level (50). The level increase stops on the way. In that case, an image in which the wall 92 is not completely destroyed by the destruction operation of the character 91 is displayed. Then, after the image in which the wall 92 is not completely destroyed is displayed, when the rank-up presence / absence notification timing is reached, the messages 96 “failure” and “round end” are displayed, and the game state round is further given. Without being ranked up, no rank-up notification indicating that the degree of advantage for the player is not ranked up is executed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the round does not continue when such a rank-up non-notification is made.

  In the display of the level gauge 93, when the level displayed on the level gauge 93 reaches the first upper limit value (for example, level 40) in the first to third round winning effect execution periods, the level display increases. Restricted (prohibited). For example, during the winning effect execution period, a total of 20 or more game balls may be won in the big winning opening. Even in this case, the level display of the level gauge 93 is the first upper limit value (for example, Control is performed to restrict (inhibit) at level 40). The control for limiting the increase in the level display in this way is performed in order to ensure execution of the effect display on the level gauge 93 according to the operation of the operation button 120 in the operation effect execution period. In other words, even when the game ball has won too many prizes during the winning effect execution period, it is possible to prevent the execution of the effects as described above from being hindered during the subsequent operation effect executing period. In the subsequent operation effect execution period, the destructive force level displayed in the level page is changed from the first upper limit value (40) to the second upper limit value (40) according to the operation of the operation button 120. The control is increased up to 50).

  In addition, the fifth to seventh rounds are winning effect execution periods, and the first effects similar to the first to third rounds described above are executed as the rank-up effects. The 8th to 16th rounds of the 16R probability variation big hit B and the 8th round of the 16R probability variation big hit C are the operation effect execution periods, and the 4th to 16th rounds of the 16R probability variation big hit A or the 16R probability variable big hit B, The second effect similar to the fourth round of C is executed.

  Note that the level of the level gauge 93 may be increased by one level for each winning game ball. Also, the level at which the level gauge 93 increases for each winning game ball may vary depending on the round (for example, it increases by 1 in the first round, increases by 2 in the second round, and increases in 2 in the third round) Increase by 3). If it does in this way, the change aspect of production will differ for every round, and the interest of a game will improve.

  In the first effect (winning effect), the second effect (operation effect) is started when the level gauge 93 does not reach the first upper limit (40) when the third round is completed. At a predetermined timing up to, an effect may be performed in which the level of the level gauge 93 is forcibly increased to the first upper limit value (40) regardless of the number of winning balls. Such an effect may be executed on condition that the player's intention has been confirmed, such as when the operation button 120 is operated by the player.

  In addition, depending on the degree of advantage for the player in the big hit gaming state, the effect form of the rank-up effect may be different. For example, when a round in which a winning can be substantially continued continues, the number of level gauges 93 increased for each winning of a game ball in the first performance is larger than when such a round is not continued. Alternatively, the rate at which the number of level increases in the level game 93 for each winning prize increases may be increased. Further, when the round in which a prize can be substantially continued is continued, the number of level increases of the level gauge 93 for each operation in the second effect may be increased as compared to the case where such a round is not continued. You may make it the ratio which the level increase number of the level game 93 for every operation increases increases.

  Further, for example, when a round in which a winning can be substantially continued continues, a level display is displayed for each game ball winning in the first effect (winning effect) with the level gauge 93 as compared to the case where such a round is not continued. Different colors may be used. Further, for example, when a substantially winning round continues, the level gauge 93 displays a level for each predetermined number of operations in the second effect (operation effect) compared to when such a round is not continued. The colors may be different.

  Also, for example, when a round in which a winning can be substantially continued continues, the level display on the level gauge 93 reaches the second upper limit (50) in the first effect (winning effect) and waits for the execution of the second effect. Instead, an effect may be performed in which it is determined that the first effect (winning effect) is a big hit.

  Further, the rank-up effect by the first effect (winning effect) may be executed not only during the round but also in the interval period between rounds.

  Next, processing contents of the effect control process in the big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (S804) in the effect control process.

  In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has been received is set (S901). When the big prize opening opening flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S902), and in accordance with the contents of the process data n, the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, various The control of the LEDs 25, 28, etc. is executed (S903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays an effect symbol combination that results in a jackpot display and displays a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S906), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S908).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set in S901, the effect control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (S909), and selects process data corresponding to the production during the round (S910). Then, the process timer is started (S911), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S912).

  Further, in the case of a small hit or 2R probability variable big hit, a predetermined common effect that suggests a small hit or 2R probability variable big hit based on reception of the small hit start command or big hit start 6 designation command. Execute. In the case of a small hit or 2R probability change big hit, the effect is not executed based on the reception of the small hit start command or the big hit start designation 6 command, but for example, a variation pattern command for a small hit or 2R probability change big hit. On the basis of the fact that it is received, an effect that suggests that it is a small hit or 2R probability variation big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or 2R probability variation big hit every process time, and performs an effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (S805) in the effect control process.

  In the in-round processing of FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a big hit end designation command or a small hit end designation command as a hit end designation command has been received (S1901). If not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a flag after opening the special prize opening indicating that the designation command after opening the special prize opening has been received is set (S1902).

  When the flag after the special winning opening is not set in S1902, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1903).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, various LEDs 25, 28, etc.) according to the contents of process data n (display control execution data n) (S1904). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the character ROM in accordance with the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 109. And a control signal is output. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this case, for example, in a round in which no rank-up effect is performed, effect control for displaying a normal image during a round other than the rank-up effect is performed. On the other hand, in the round in which the rank-up effect is performed, effect control for displaying an in-round image such as a background image in the rank-up effect is performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a rank-up effect process (S1905). Thereby, during the round in which the rank-up effect is executed, the effect in the winning effect execution period in the rank-up effect or the effect in the operation effect execution period in the rank-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. The The processing content of the rank-up effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (S1906), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S1907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S1908).

  Thus, by performing time management using the process timer and sequentially switching the process data, for example, various effect controls including a rank-up effect shown in FIG. 41 are performed. The first effect (winning effect) in the rank-up effect is executed during each of the first to third rounds of 16R probability variation jackpots A to C and the fifth to seventh rounds of 16R probability variation jackpots B and C. . Further, during each of the 4th to 16th rounds of 16R probability variation big hit A, the second effect of the rank-up effect (operation effect) with the period combined with the interval period of the 4th to 15th rounds as the operation effect execution period. Is executed. Further, during the fourth round of 16R probability variation big hits B and C, the second effect (operation effect) of the rank-up effect is executed. Further, during the eighth round of 16R probability variation big hit C, the second effect (operation effect) of the rank-up effect is executed.

  In this case, for example, the effect display device 9 displays an in-round image such as a rank-up effect image as shown in FIG. 41, and an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds and other images is executed. An image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed.

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in S1902, the effect control CPU 101 selects an interval effect (an effect of performing an interval display according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the designation command after opening the big prize opening. (S1908). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (S1909), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (S1910). Then, the process timer is started (S1911), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806) (S1912).

  When the winning end designation command reception flag is set in S1901, it is when the big hit end designation command or the small hit end designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag of the big hit end designation command reception flag or the small hit end designation command reception flag (S1913). Next, process data corresponding to the ending effect (big hit end effect or small hit end process) is selected according to the received hit end designation command (S1914). Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the production time measurement timer and starts the process timer (S1915). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S807) (S1916), and ends the round process.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the special prize opening open designation command has been received is set (S1971). When the big prize opening opening flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1972).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, various LEDs 25, 28, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n) (S1973). . For example, in order to display an image according to the interval effect or the rank-up effect on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the character ROM according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is Output to the VDP 109 and a control signal. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this case, for example, in a round in which the rank-up effect is not performed, effect control for displaying a predetermined normal interval image other than the rank-up effect is performed. On the other hand, in the round in which the rank-up effect is performed, effect control for displaying an image such as a background image in the rank-up effect is performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a rank-up effect process (S1974). Thereby, in the interval between rounds which performs a rank up effect, the effect in the operation effect execution period in a rank up effect as shown in FIG. 41 is performed. Thereby, in the interval between rounds which performs a rank improvement effect, the effect according to the period of the interval between rounds in a rank improvement effect is performed. The processing content of the rank-up effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S1976), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S1977). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S1978).

  As described above, time management is performed using the process timer and process data is sequentially switched, so that the 16R normal big hit, 16R probability big hit B to D, 2R probability big hit and small hit are determined in advance. Normal interval effect is executed. On the other hand, during the 4-15th round interval period of 16R probability variation big hit A, the second of the rank-up effects executed as the operation effect execution period described later, which is the sum of the 4th-16th round mid-periods. An effect (an operation effect described later) is executed. In addition, during the interval period of the 8th to 15th rounds of the 16R probability variation big hit B, the second of the rank-up effects executed as the operation effect execution period to be described later, which is a combination of the 8th to 16th rounds of the intermediate period. An effect (an operation effect described later) is executed.

  If the big prize opening open flag is set in S1971, the big prize opening open flag is reset (S1980), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (S1981). Then, the process timer is started (S1982), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S1983).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a rank-up effect process (S1905, S1974) executed in the mid-round process and the post-round process.

  In the rank-up effect process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the present is the winning effect execution period (S971). Specifically, in S971, based on the information on the jackpot type specified by the received jackpot start designation command and the information on the number of rounds specified by the received bonus winning opening open designation command, Winning effect execution period (first to third R of probability variation jackpots A to C, seventh to ninth R of probability variation jackpots B and C, fourth to sixteenth R of probability variation jackpot A, eighth to sixteenth R of probability variation jackpot B To check if it falls under any of the rounds.

  If the current time is not the winning effect execution period in S971, it is confirmed whether or not the present is the operation effect execution period (S975A). Specifically, in S975A, based on the received information on the number of rounds specified by the designated command after opening the big winning opening, the current interval period is one of the winning effect execution periods (the fourth to the second of the promising big hit A). During the round of 16R, during the interval after 4R to 15R of probability variation jackpot A, during the fourth and eighth to 16R rounds of probability variation jackpot B, during the interval after 8R to 15R after probability variation jackpot A, It is confirmed whether it corresponds to any of the 4th and 8th rounds of the probable big hit C.

  If the current time is not the operation effect execution period in S975A, the rank-up process is terminated. As a result, when the current time does not correspond to either the winning effect execution period or the operation effect execution period, the rank-up effect process ends without performing any substantial process.

  When it is determined in S971 that the present is the winning effect execution period, it is confirmed whether or not a winning of a game ball to the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 (S972). When no winning is detected in S972, it is confirmed whether or not the destructive force level currently displayed on the level gauge 93 is less than the first upper limit (40) (S973). Whether the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 or not is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 every time a win is detected by the count switch 23. Judgment is made based on the received winning prize winning designation command. Further, whether or not the game ball is won at the big winning opening by the count switch 23 is detected by inputting the detection signal of the count switch 23 to the production control microcomputer 100 and determining based on the detection signal. May be.

  When the destructive force level is not less than the first upper limit value (40), the rank-up effect process ends. Thereby, in the winning effect execution period, the display of the destructive power level is limited to less than the first upper limit value (40). On the other hand, when the destructive force level is less than the first upper limit value (40), as shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and 41 (B), in the destructive level display of the level gauge 93, 2 for each winning prize. An effect of increasing the level display (ranked level increase effect) is performed (S974). And the effect (level increase interlocking production) which changes the destruction mode of the wall 92 in a mode interlocking with such a rank-up level increase production like the destruction mode of the wall 92 shown in FIG. 41 (B) is performed. (S975), the rank-up effect process ends.

  Thus, in the winning effect execution period, the rank-up level increasing effect is performed in which the level display of the level gauge 93 increases in accordance with winning in the big winning opening. Thereby, in a prize production | presentation execution period, a player's expectation can be raised based on a production aspect changing according to the prize-winning to a big prize opening. In addition, since the level increase interlocking effect that changes the destruction mode of the wall 92 is performed in a mode interlocking with the rank increase level increasing effect, the two types of interlocking effects are executed during the winning effect execution period, so that the player Can be further enhanced.

  When it is determined in S975A described above that the present is the operation effect execution period, it is confirmed based on the operation detection signal from the operation button 120 whether or not an operation of the operation button 120 is detected (S976). If no operation is detected in S976, the process proceeds to S980 described below. On the other hand, when an operation is detected in S976, it is confirmed whether or not the destructive force level currently displayed on the level gauge 93 is less than the second upper limit (50) (S977).

  When the destructive force level is not less than the second upper limit value (50), the process proceeds to S980 described later. On the other hand, when the destructive force level is less than the second upper limit value (50), as shown in FIG. 41C, 1 is displayed for every predetermined number of operations of the operation button 120 in the destructive level display of the level gauge 93. An effect of increasing the level display (ranked level increase effect) is performed (S978). Then, as in the destruction mode of the wall 92 shown in FIG. 41C, an effect (level increase interlocking effect) for changing the destruction mode of the wall 92 is performed in a manner interlocked with such a rank-up level increasing effect. (S979), the process proceeds to S980.

  Thus, in the operation effect execution period, a rank-up level increasing effect is performed in which the level display of the level gauge 93 increases in accordance with the number of operations of the operation button 120. Thereby, in an operation effect execution period, a player's expectation can be raised based on the effect mode changing according to the operation time of the operation button 120. In addition, since the level increase interlocking effect that changes the destruction mode of the wall 92 is performed in a mode interlocking with the rank increase level increasing effect, the two types of interlocking effects are executed during the winning effect execution period, so that the player Can be further enhanced.

  In S980, it is confirmed whether it is a rank up presence notification timing (S980). The rank-up presence / absence notification timing is set as a timing after the processing time has elapsed since the start of the operation effect execution period, and at least a general player operates the operation button 120 from the start of the operation effect execution period to set the first. It is set to a time during which the level display of the level gauge 93 can be easily increased from the upper limit value to the second upper limit value.

  If it is not the rank-up presence / absence notification timing in S980, the rank-up effect process ends. On the other hand, when it is a rank-up presence / absence notification timing in S980, it is confirmed whether or not there is a rank-up rank (S981). Specifically, in S981, based on the number of rounds specified by the received designation command after opening the big prize opening, the present is an operation effect execution period after the third round, an operation effect execution period after the seventh round, The number of rounds can be determined by checking whether the round will continue after the operation effect execution period based on the information of the jackpot type specified by the received jackpot start designation command. Check if there is a rank up.

  When there is a rank increase in the number of rounds in S981, a rank up notification as shown in FIG. 41D is executed (S982). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the operation button has been operated at least once in the operation effect execution period (S983). In the rank-up effect process, when it is determined that there is a button operation in S976, a process of setting a predetermined button operation flag is performed. In S983, based on whether or not such a button operation presence flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the operation button has been operated at least once during the operation effect execution period.

  When it is determined in S983 that the operation button 120 has been operated at least once, the round effect A that displays a special character that is displayed only when the operation button 120 is operated and the round continues in the rank-up effect. Thereafter, the effect is set as an effect to be executed in the subsequent round, and a process for executing the effect by the set round effect A in the subsequent round is performed (S984). Then, the rank-up effect process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S983 that the operation button 120 has not been operated even once, a general-purpose character that is frequently displayed in an effect other than the rank-up effect such as the character displayed in the waiting demonstration display is displayed. The round effect B to be performed is set as an effect to be executed in the subsequent round, and processing for executing the effect of the set round effect B in the subsequent round is performed (S985). Then, the rank-up effect process ends.

  In this way, depending on whether or not the operation button 120 is operated in the rank-up effect, the effect of the game in the subsequent rounds can be different, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, when the operation button 120 is operated at least once in a rank-up effect, a round effect A that displays a special character in a subsequent round is executed, thereby causing a feeling of scarcity of the effect. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when there is no rank increase in the number of rounds in the above-described S981, the rank-up non-notification as described above is executed (S986), and the rank-up effect process is terminated.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern in which the operation button 120 can be used in the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol, that is, a variation pattern in which the operation of the operation button 120 is accepted during the variation display and a predetermined rendering is performed. In such a case, a control example will be described in which the operation during the change display is not erroneously recognized as an operation for instructing the above-described pre-reading notice effect cancellation (stage shift from the special stage to the normal stage).

  In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 includes an operable fluctuation pattern in which the operation button 120 can be used during the fluctuation display, and can be operated at a predetermined ratio. A variation pattern is executed. As an example of the operable variation pattern in which the operation button 120 can be used, for example, during execution of the variation display, a predetermined number of options are displayed, and one of the options is selected according to the operation of the operation button 120. There is an effect in which the selection result performs an effect that affects the variable display result.

  When such an operable variation pattern is executable, the operation of the operation button 120 during the variation display when the operable variation pattern is executed is the stage transition as described above (transition from the special stage to the normal stage). ) Must not be mistakenly recognized as an operation.

  Specifically, in the prefetching notice effect canceling process shown in FIG. 37, when it is determined in S863 that the prefetching notice effect canceling operation availability notification is being made, the fluctuation display when the operable fluctuation pattern is currently selected is displayed. If the variable display is not executed, the process proceeds to S864 and the subsequent steps. If the variable display is executed, a process of ending the prefetch advance notice cancellation process is performed. In such processing, whether or not the variation display is executed is confirmed by determining whether or not the process of the production control process corresponds to the process that is performing the variation display, and the variation pattern during the variation display is determined. Whether or not is an operable variation pattern is determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern command received at the start of execution of the variation display has an operable variation pattern.

  In this way, in the state where the pre-reading notice effect cancellation operation is possible, that is, in the state where the operation for shifting from the special stage according to the operation of the operation button 120 is possible, When the variation pattern in the variation display is an operable variation pattern, the stage transition processing in S864 to S866 is not executed, so the operation of the operation button 120 during the variation display corresponds to the cancellation of the pre-reading notice effect (stage transition). The operation of the operation button 120 is recognized as an operation corresponding to the operable variation pattern.

  According to the second embodiment, when a variation pattern that can be used by the operation button 120 is selected, establishment of a special stage end (stage transition) condition according to the operation of the operation button 120 is prohibited. . Thereby, when the player does not intend to end the special stage being executed, the special stage can be prevented from being erroneously ended by using the operation button 120.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, in the special stage, when any special effect is selected from a plurality of types of special effects and the selected special effect is executed, the special stage release operation by the pre-reading notice effect by the operation button 120 is performed. A control example will be described in which the selection ratio of the special effect is different between when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times) that can be performed and after it is executed.

  Here, the special effect is a special effect executed on the special stage. Special effects include effects executed only on special stages. The special effects include effects that are executed on the special stage and the normal stage, and that are easier to execute on the special stage than the normal stage. As described above, the special effect according to the third embodiment may be an effect that causes the player to feel as a special effect executed on the special stage.

  A specific example of the special effect includes display of a special character image related to the special stage. Further, specific examples of special effects include display of effect symbols in a display form such as a shape, pattern, and color related to the special stage. For example, a special character image related to a special stage as a special effect is displayed more than once every time a change display of the effect symbol is executed (for example, every time a change display is started) in the special stage. A character image selected from the special character images is displayed.

  When a special character image is used as a specific example of the special effect, in the third embodiment, each time a variable display is started, one character image is selected from a plurality of special character images having a selection ratio set in advance. A process of selecting and displaying the selected character image on the effect display device 9 is performed.

  In the third embodiment, as a selection table for selecting a special character image, for example, a first selection table in which a first selection ratio is set and a second selection ratio different from the first selection ratio are set. The second selection table is provided. For example, in the effect symbol variation start process of S801 in FIG. 33, a process for selecting a special character image to be displayed is performed using any of these selection tables. These selection tables are stored in a ROM mounted on the effect control board 80.

  In the process of selecting a special character image, in the special stage, the first display is performed until a predetermined number of times (five times) of variable display is performed so that the special stage can be released by the pre-reading notice effect by the operation button 120. After the predetermined number of times (five times) of variable display is executed using the selection table, control for selecting a special character image is performed using the second selection table. By performing such processing, a plurality of types of special displays are performed until a predetermined number of times (five times) of variable display that allows the special stage canceling operation to be performed and after the variable display is performed. Since the selection ratio of the character image is different, the selection ratio of the special effect is different depending on whether or not the end condition for ending the special stage is satisfied. Interest can be improved. Further, the player recognizes what special effects are likely to be selected, and based on the type of special effects to be executed, the player determines whether or not an end condition for ending the special stage is satisfied. Can be grasped.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the game history is accumulated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the accumulated game history is output to the outside, the game history to be output has a predetermined effect that is set to be executable only in the special stage. An example in which information indicating whether or not the execution has been performed will be described.

  FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration example of a gaming system including the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of overall processing of the gaming system. In the fourth embodiment, for example, a predetermined effect such as the special character image described in the third embodiment is executed only on the special stage.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the gaming system includes a pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in a gaming store, and a privilege granting server 300 that is provided outside the gaming store and performs a process of granting a predetermined privilege to a player. Including. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system may include a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. The plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 may be installed in the same game store or may be installed in different game stores.

  Referring to FIG. 47, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provides an effect display based on the establishment of game information output conditions such as occurrence of three consecutive probability variation big hits, occurrence of five consecutive probability variation big hits, occurrence of ten consecutive probability variation big hits, etc. A two-dimensional code (QR code (registered trademark)) is displayed on the display screen (liquid crystal screen) of the apparatus 9 (S2001). The game information output condition is not limited to such an example, but when the game time exceeds a predetermined time regardless of the game state, at the end of the game, or after the end of a specific jackpot game state, etc. It may be when other conditions are satisfied.

  Next, the player who has played a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 uses the portable terminal 200 possessed by the player (a mobile phone in this example) to display the two-dimensional code displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Perform the shooting operation. Then, the mobile terminal 200 captures a QR code (registered trademark) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the player's operation (S2002). Then, the portable terminal 200 transmits the photographed QR code (registered trademark) to the privilege grant server 300 together with the terminal ID and the like via the communication network 400 such as the Internet (S2003).

  Next, when the privilege grant server 300 receives the QR code (registered trademark), the privilege grant server 300 analyzes the received QR code (registered trademark) and sends game history data specified by the QR code (registered trademark) via the communication network 400. It transmits to the portable terminal 200 (S2004). The mobile terminal 200 displays the game history data received from the privilege grant server 300 (S2005). By performing such display, the player can check the game history transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, when the privilege grant server 300 receives the QR code (registered trademark), the privilege grant server 300 determines image content to be granted as a privilege to the player based on the data specified by the received QR code (registered trademark) ( S2006). In this embodiment, image content is given as a privilege. However, the present invention is not limited to image content, and for example, music content such as an incoming melody, coupon information, or the like may be given as a privilege. Then, the privilege grant server 300 transmits the determined image content to the mobile terminal 200 via the communication network 400 (step S2007). The mobile terminal 200 displays the image content received from the privilege grant server 300 (S2008). By performing such display, the player can confirm the image content given as the privilege.

  Next, a specific method for generating an image of a two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display device 9 will be described. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of generating a two-dimensional code image displayed on the effect display device 9.

  The production control CPU 101 extracts the current date and time (year / year / month / day / hour / minute / second) from the real-time clock provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and from the RAM mounted on the production control board 80. The value of the R register corresponding to the image of the two-dimensional code to be displayed, and the game history (usually the number of big hits / number of chances of big hits / number of small hits / variable effect symbols performed between big hits and big hits The number of display times / the total number of variable display of effect symbols / number of prize balls / special stage character display information / super reach special character display information) is extracted. Data relating to the game history is stored in a game history storage area provided in the RAM of the effect control board 80. In order to store such game history from the main board 31, the effect control board 80 receives a signal specifying each game information, and stores game history information in the game history storage area based on the signal. To go. The game history information may be managed by providing a game history storage area in the RAM 55 of the main board 31.

  Here, the special stage character display information is information specifying whether or not a special stage character that is displayed only on the special stage is displayed, and indicates the number of times the special stage character is displayed.

  The super-reach special character display information is information that specifies whether or not a character that can be displayed on either the special stage or the normal stage is displayed, and indicates the number of times the super-reach special character is displayed. It is. Super-reach special characters are selected and displayed at a predetermined ratio when they become super-reach. The selection ratio of the super reach special character is set to be selected at a higher ratio in the special stage than in the normal stage.

  In addition, about each of the super reach special character display information and the super reach special character display information, the example in which the number of times of display is specified is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information on whether or not the display has been displayed is specified. It may be a thing.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 adds the model ID of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the extracted date and time, the value of the R register, and the game history, and encrypts it with the common key. Specifically, for example, model ID / year / month / day / hour / minute / second / value of R register / number of normal jackpots / number of probability variation jackpots / number of jackpots / between jackpot and jackpot The number of variable display times of effect symbols performed / total number of variable display times of effect symbols / number of prize balls / special stage character display information / super reach special character display information is encrypted with a common key.

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 adds the encrypted character string as a parameter to the URL of the privilege grant server, and converts it into a two-dimensional code.

  Note that the information included in the two-dimensional code (QR code (registered trademark)) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, a two-dimensional code including day of the week as date information may be generated. In addition, for example, a two-dimensional code including information that can specify the current gaming state such as a probability change state, a short time state, and a big hit gaming state may be generated.

  As described above, as information on the game history output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, information on whether or not the special stage character display as an effect set to be executable only on the special stage has been executed (special stage character display information). Is included, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the special stage.

  Further, as information on the game history output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, information on whether or not the super-reach special character display as an effect set so that the special stage is more easily executed than the normal stage is executed (super Reach special character display information) is included, so that the interest of the game for the special stage can be further improved.

  In addition, as information regarding each of the special stage character display and the super reach special character display information as the game history information output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, an example of outputting information as to whether or not these character displays have been executed is output. Although shown, it is not restricted to this, You may make it output the information which shows the frequency | count that these character displays were performed. And based on such information, what kind of privilege should be given to a player should just differ according to the number of times each of special stage character display and super reach special character display was performed. In this way, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game for the special stage.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. An example in which characteristic control applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in the first to fourth embodiments is applied to a slot machine will be described.

  First, the basic configuration and control contents of the slot machine will be described. FIG. 49 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment. The front door of the slot machine 200 can be opened by inserting a key into the locking device 19 and turning it clockwise. On the upper front side of the slot machine 200, a variable display device 2a is provided. The variable display device 2a includes a reel unit 3a (see FIG. 50). In the reel unit 3a, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described later, and reel motors 3ML, 3MC, and 3MR (see FIG. 50) for rotating / stopping the reels with respect to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively. Reel sensors 3SL, 3SC, 3SR (see FIG. 50) for detecting the reference position, and a reel lamp 3LP (see FIG. 50) for irradiating light from the back are provided.

  On the outer peripheries of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, "1", "2", "3", "4", "Red 7", "Blue 7", "BAR", "Replay 1", "Replay" A plurality of types of symbols such as “2” that are distinguishable from each other are drawn in a predetermined order. “Red 7”, “Blue 7” and “BAR” are larger than “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “Replay 1”, “Replay 2”, and have a particularly wide width. Yes, even when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating, the player can recognize the symbols relatively easily. “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “Replay 1”, “Replay 2” are recognized by the player when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating. It has become difficult. The variable display device 2a allows the player to display a symbol drawn on the outer periphery of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotated / stopped by the reel motors 3ML, 3MC, and 3MR from a see-through window formed on the upper part of the front door. It is configured to be visible. The variable display device 2a can lead the three symbols drawn on the outer periphery of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R that are stopped to upper, middle, and lower three stages.

  The variable display device 2a includes a first line configured from the upper stage of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a second line configured from the lower stage of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and an upper stage and reels of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The third line composed of the lower stage of 3R, the fourth line composed of the lower stage of each of reels 3L and 3C and the upper stage of reel 3R, and the fifth line composed of the upper stage of reel 3L and the lower stage of each of reels 3C and 3R A sixth line configured from the lower stage of the reel 3L and the upper stage of each of the reels 3C and 3R, a seventh line configured from the upper stage of each of the reels 3L and 3R and the lower stage of the reel 3C, and the lower stage of each of the reels 3L and 3R A total of eight pay lines are set for the eighth line configured from the upper stage of the reel 3C. In other words, the winning line includes all lines formed by combinations of the upper and lower stages of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Since the winning line is provided in this way, it is possible to make a winning by stopping symbols constituting each combination described later at the upper or lower stage of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be described in more detail later.

  A liquid crystal display 4a as an effect unit is provided below the variable display device 2a and at a substantially central position on the front side of the slot machine 200. The liquid crystal display 4a is larger in size than the variable display device 2a, and the height of the player's line of sight when the player (assuming an average height) sits in front of the slot machine 200. Since it is provided at a position where it becomes, it is easy to visually recognize even with the variable display device 2a.

  The liquid crystal display 4a displays various effects images according to the progress of the game, such as the gaming state and the setting status of the winning flag. For example, a background image corresponding to the gaming state is displayed on the liquid crystal display 4a. The liquid crystal display 4a displays an image for informing the setting status of the winning flag and the winning status. In the liquid crystal display 4a, these images are displayed in accordance with the rotation / stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the variable display device 2a, and then correspond to the display results of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the variable display device 2a. The effect result image is displayed. Further, in the liquid crystal display 4a, when winning a small combination continuously based on the display result of the variable display device 2a, a predetermined effect such as a small combination continuous winning effect described later is performed. Furthermore, it is possible to display various information directly or indirectly related to the game on the liquid crystal display 4a.

  On the left side of the liquid crystal display 4a, from the top, a payout display unit 21a, a credit display unit 22, a bonus notification unit 36, a replay display unit 32b, a start display unit 30a, an insertion instruction display unit 29a, and a hit display Part 34 is provided. The payout display unit 21a is composed of a 7-segment display payout display 53 (see FIG. 50), and displays the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small role described later. The credit display unit 22 is constituted by a credit display 52 (see FIG. 50) using a 7-segment display, and displays the number of credits accumulated as data according to the number of inserted medals and the number of paid-out coins as will be described later.

  When the bonus notification lamp 66 (see FIG. 50) is turned on, the bonus notification unit 36 has a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a challenge bonus (1) as advantageous states advantageous to the player described later. ) And the challenge bonus (2), the player is notified that the winning is possible. In the present embodiment, such a notification is made at a predetermined rate (an extremely low rate, for example, a rate of 5% or less) by the control unit 120a described later when the game winning the bonus is started. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the bonus has been won. The insertion instruction display unit 29a indicates that a medal can be inserted by turning on the insertion instruction lamp 59a (see FIG. 50). The start display unit 30a indicates that the start lamp 60 (see FIG. 50) is lit, so that the start can be started, that is, the operation of the start lever 11 can be accepted. The replay display unit 32b indicates that a replay winning to be described later has been made when the replay lamp 62 (see FIG. 50) is turned on. When the HIT lamp 54 (see FIG. 50) is turned on, the hit display unit 34 has a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a challenge bonus, except for the challenge bonus (2) described later. Win a prize in any one of (1) and inform that it is a bonus. In this embodiment, such notification is performed after a predetermined number of games (for example, two games) have been played after winning the bonus. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a bonus has been won until a predetermined number of games have been played after winning the bonus.

  On the right side of the liquid crystal display 4a, winning display portions 25a to 25d are provided. The winning display units 25a to 25d indicate that winning display results corresponding to the variable display device 2a are derived by the blinking of the winning display lamps 45a to 45d (see FIG. 50).

  Further, a medal slot 13b, a single BET button 14b, a MAXBET button 15b, and a settlement button 16b are provided on a horizontal surface of a table-like portion provided below the liquid crystal display 4a. The BET button lamps 70a and 70b (see FIG. 50), which are turned on when the number of bets can be set from the credits (maximum 50) accumulated as data, are arranged inside the single BET button 14b and the MAX BET button 15b. Has been.

  The medal insertion slot 13b is for a player to insert a medal from here, and when the insertion medal sensor 44 (see FIG. 50) detects the insertion of a medal when the insertion instruction display unit 29a is lit. A bet amount is set or credits are accumulated as data. The single BET button 14b and the MAXBET button 15b are buttons that are operated by the player when setting the number of bets (1, 3 respectively) from the credits stored as data. When it is detected by the sheet BET switch 45 (see FIG. 50) or the MAXBET switch 46 (see FIG. 50), the bet amount from the credit is set.

  The number of bets that can be set in each game by inserting a medal from the medal slot 13b, operating the single BET button 14b, or the MAXBET button 15b is 3 in any gaming state. When the bet number is set, the start lever 11 can accept the operation, and the game can be started. The settlement button 16b is a button for instructing the payout of credits. When an operation is detected by the settlement switch 47 (see FIG. 50), medals corresponding to the credits accumulated as data are paid out.

  On the vertical surface of the trapezoidal portion, there are provided a start lever 11, stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R, and a medal clogging elimination button 18 that mechanically vibrates the slot machine 200 when a medal is jammed. ing. The start lever 11 is operated by the player when starting the game. When the operation is detected by the start switch 41a (see FIG. 50), the reel drive motors 3ML, 3MC, 3MR are started to be driven. 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate. When the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R can be operated when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate, the operation effective lamps 63L, 63C, and 63R (FIG. 50) provided therein are enabled. (See) is lit, and the player is informed.

  The stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R are buttons that the player operates to stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at a desired timing, respectively, and the operations are stop switches 42L, 42C, and 42R (see FIG. 50). Is detected, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop buttons 12L, 12C, 12R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is 190 milliseconds. The reels 3L, 3C and 3R rotate 80 times per minute and change the design of 80 x 21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so a maximum of 4 symbols in 190 milliseconds Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop button is used as a reference, the symbols from the symbol to the fourth frame ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, when any one of the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbol displayed in the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop button. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line. In addition, as described above, all lines composed of combinations of the upper or lower stages of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are set as the winning lines, and the symbols constituting each role are the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. It is configured to be able to win a prize by stopping at each upper stage or lower stage. For this reason, a combination of symbols arranged within 7 frames on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be awarded regardless of the timing at which the stop button is operated, thereby preventing the occurrence of missing. be able to.

  When the challenge time (CT) provided during the challenge bonus described later is controlled, the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop button 12C until the corresponding reel 3C stops rotating is reduced to 75 milliseconds. Is done. A maximum of one frame can be drawn in 75 milliseconds. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbol are symbols for a total of two frames including the symbol displayed when the stop button 12C is operated and the symbol one frame ahead.

  A medal payout port 71 and a medal storage tray 72 are provided on the lower front side of the slot machine 200. The medal payout port 71 discharges medals paid out by the hopper 80a (see FIG. 50) to the outside. The medal storage tray 72 is for storing paid-out medals. The front panel on the medal storage tray 72 is irradiated with light emitted from the fluorescent lamp 6 (see FIG. 50) installed therein.

  Speakers 7L and 7R are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device 2a, respectively, as rendering means. The speakers 7L and 7R output a sound effect when a predetermined combination (for example, a small combination, a re-playing combination, etc.) wins, output an alarm sound at the time of abnormality, and various effects according to the gaming state Audio output is performed.

  Further, on the front side of the slot machine 200, an effect by light is performed by light emission of game effect lamps 75A to 75E (see FIG. 50) as effect means so as to surround the variable display device 2a and the liquid crystal display 4a. Game effect display sections 5A to 5E are provided. The game effect display units 5A to 5E perform effects by light in various patterns according to the progress of the game. Note that the light emission colors of the game effect display portions 5A to 5E may be a single color or a plurality of colors. The game effect display units 5A to 5E may emit light according to the type of winning combination.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the configuration of the control circuit of the slot machine 200. As shown in the figure, the control circuit of the slot machine 200 includes a power supply board 100a, a game control board 101a, an effect control board 102a, a reel relay board 103a, a reel lamp relay board 104a, an external output board 105a, and an effect relay board 106a. It is divided roughly.

  The power supply board 100a transforms an external power supply voltage of AC 100V and supplies operating power to each part of the game control board 101a and other slot machines 200. In FIG. 50, it is shown that only the game control board 101a, the hopper 80a, and the switches 91 to 94 are connected, but the power supply board 100a also supplies power to other parts. The power supply board 100a is provided in the slot machine 200, and is connected to a hopper 80a including a hopper motor 82 for performing a medal payout operation and a payout sensor 81 for detecting the medal payout.

  The power supply board 100a sets a winning probability for an internal lottery to be described later, and a setting switch 91a and a setting switch 91a for changing setting values (setting 1 to setting 4) of medal payout rates calculated based on the probability. Are also connected to a setting key switch 92a for enabling the operation, a second reset switch 93a for resetting the internal state (RAM 112), and a main switch 94a for switching on / off of the power supply. Is sent to the game control board 101a. These switches 91 to 94 are provided inside the slot machine 200. As will be described later, the second reset switch 93a is a means for receiving a release operation for releasing the stop state when the stop control for stopping the progress of the game is performed and the stop state is controlled. is there.

  The game control board 101a is a control board on the main side that controls the overall flow of the game in the slot machine 200. The game control board 101a includes a control unit 110 including a CPU 111, a RAM 112, a ROM 113, and an I / O port 114. It is installed. Further, a random number generation circuit 115, a sampling circuit 116, a power supply monitoring circuit 117, a reset circuit 118, and the like are mounted.

  The CPU 111 has an interrupt function (including an interrupt disable function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 113 to perform processing related to the progress of the game, and also in the slot machine 200 Control each part of the control circuit directly or indirectly. One word of data handled by the CPU 111 is 8 bits (1 byte), and the addresses of the RAM 112 and the ROM 113 are also assigned in units of 8 bits.

  The RAM 112 is used as a work area when the CPU 111 executes a program. The ROM 113 stores programs executed by the CPU 111 and fixed data. The allocation of the addresses of the RAM 112 and the ROM 113 is different between the development model in the manufacturer and the mass production model delivered to the hall. The I / O port 114 inputs and outputs control signals to and from each circuit connected to the game control board 101a.

  The random number generation circuit 115 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 116 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 115. . The random number generation circuit 115 is provided for each type of random number used for the progress of the game, and a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number is determined. The CPU 111 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 116 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 115 as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a hardware random number function). As a random number for internal lottery described later, a numerical value obtained by processing a numerical value extracted by the hardware random number function by software is used.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 117 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 200 and, when detecting a voltage drop (for example, determining whether or not the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage), sends a voltage drop signal to the control unit 110. Output circuit. Although not specifically illustrated, the control unit 110 includes an interrupt input terminal. When a voltage drop signal is input to the interrupt input terminal, an external interrupt is generated, and the CPU 111 of the control unit 110 performs external interrupt. The power interruption processing is executed according to the data.

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in the parity storage area 112-7, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the operation of the control unit 110 is reliably stopped when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption interrupt process, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area 112-7, and compared with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup, It is possible to confirm whether or not the data stored in the RAM is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 118 outputs a reset signal to the control unit 110 when the voltage rises to a level at which the control unit 110 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the control unit 110 and also controls the control unit 110. A reset signal is output to the control unit 110 when the reset counter value is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the control unit 110, that is, when the control unit 110 does not operate for a certain period of time. This is a circuit for restarting the control unit 110.

  The CPU 111 also has a function of updating the numerical value of the specific address in the RAM 112 by timer interrupt processing and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). The CPU 111 transmits various commands to the effect control board 102a via the I / O port 114. Each of these commands consists of 8 bits. Information (commands) is sent from the game control board 101a to the effect control board 102a in only one direction, and information (commands) is not sent from the effect control board 102a to the game control board 101a.

  Connected to the game control board 101a are a single BET switch 45, a MAXBET switch 46, a start switch 41a, stop switches 42L, 42C, 42R, a settlement switch 47, a first reset switch 48, and an insertion medal sensor 44. Detection signals from the switches / sensors are input. In addition, detection signals of the reel sensors 3SL, 3SC, 3SR are input via the reel relay substrate 103a. In accordance with the detection signals of these switches / sensors input via the I / O port 114 or the detection signals of various switches input via the power supply board 100a as described above, the CPU 111 on the game control board 101a Processing is in progress.

  The game control board 101a also includes a flow path switching solenoid 49, a payout display 53, a credit display 52, a loading instruction lamp 59a, a start lamp 60, a replay lamp 62, a HIT lamp 54, BET button lamps 70a and 70b, and an operation. Valid lamps 63L, 63C, 63R and winning display lamps 45a to 45d are connected, and the CPU 111 controls these operations according to the progress of the game.

  In addition, reel motors 3ML, 3MC, and 3MR are connected to the game control board 101a via a reel relay board 103a. The CPU 111 refers to the winning flag set in the RAM 112 and controls the reel motors 3ML, 3MC, and 3MR via the reel relay board 103a to stop the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. An effect control board 102a is further connected to the game control board 101a via an effect relay board 106a.

  The effect relay board 106a is a board provided to ensure one-way information transmitted from the game control board 101a to the effect control board 102a. The effect relay board 106a does not check the game control board 101a and the effect control board 102a by checking this state, and an illegal signal (especially an external input to the effect control board 102a is input to the control unit 110 of the game control board 101a). It is possible to check whether or not a modification has been made such that a signal is input).

  The effect control board 102a is a sub-side control board that controls the execution of effects in the slot machine 200, and includes a control unit 120a including a CPU 121, a RAM 122, a ROM 123, and an I / O port 124. Yes. In addition, the random number generation circuit 125 and the sampling circuit 126 are mounted, and the CPU 121 acquires the value counted by the random number generation circuit 125 by the sampling circuit 126, so that the hardware random number function similar to that of the game control board 101a is obtained. Is forming. It also has a software random number function by interrupt processing.

  The CPU 121 executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 123 to perform processing related to the execution of the effect, and controls each circuit in the effect control board 102a and each circuit connected thereto. The performance is executed based on a command received from the game control board 101a via the I / O port 124. The RAM 122 is used as a work area when the CPU 121 executes a program. The ROM 123 stores programs executed by the CPU 121 and fixed data. The I / O port 124 inputs and outputs control signals to and from each circuit connected to the effect control board 102a.

  The effect control board 102a is connected with game effect lamps 75A to 75E, a liquid crystal display 4a, speakers 7L and 7R, a fluorescent lamp 6, and a bonus notification lamp 66. A reel lamp 3LP is connected via a reel lamp relay substrate 104a. The control unit 120a of the effect control board 102a performs these effects by controlling these parts.

  The reel relay board 103a relays between the game control board 101a, the external output board 105a, and the reel unit 3a. A full sensor 90 is also connected to the reel relay substrate 103a, and its detection signal is input. The full tank sensor 90 is provided inside the slot machine 200 and detects that the medals in the overflow tank storing the medals overflowed from the hopper 80a are full.

  The reel lamp relay board 104a relays between the effect control board 102a and the reel unit 3a. The external output board 105a is connected to an external device such as a hall management computer. The big bonus (1) medium signal and big bonus (2) medium signal input from the game control board 101a via the reel relay board 103a. The signal during challenge bonus (1), the signal during challenge bonus (2), the signal during regular bonus, the signal during challenge time, the medal IN signal, and the medal OUT signal are output to the external device. In addition, a winning status signal, a reel control signal, and a stop switch signal may be output to an external device.

  In the slot machine 1, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2a. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the gaming state, but can be broadly divided into big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), and challenge bonus (2). There are a special combination with a transition, a small combination with a payout of medals, and a re-playing combination that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the number of bets. The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) may be simply referred to as a big bonus, and the challenge bonus (1) and the challenge bonus (2) may be simply referred to as a challenge bonus. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the challenge bonus may be indicated as CB. Sometimes the big bonus and the challenge bonus are simply referred to as bonuses.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “Red 7-1-4” is arranged on either of the winning lines in the normal gaming state or RT. The big bonus (2) is awarded when the combination of “blue 7-4-1” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the normal gaming state or RT. When the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), respectively. In the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), there is a difference between the upper limit of the number of payout medals and the type of RT controlled after the end.

  In Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2), 12 games have been consumed or 8 games have been won until the Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) is completed It is repeatedly controlled to a regular bonus (which may be indicated as RB) in which the end condition is satisfied by the possibility. While the gaming state is the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 112, respectively. Further, while the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 112.

  Each of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) ends when an end condition is established when the number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 345. The game state is controlled by RT2 from when the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are won internally until the selected big bonus is won. Also, after the end of the big bonus (1), the gaming state is controlled to RT1 only for 100 games defined in advance. However, when the gaming state is controlled by RT1, if a special bonus such as a big bonus or a challenge bonus is won, RT1 ends at that point even if the prescribed number of games remains. In the present embodiment, an example in which the upper limit of the payout number of the big bonus (1) is set to be the same as the upper limit of the payout number of the big bonus (2) will be described. The upper limit of the payout number of bonus (1) may be different from the upper limit of the payout number of big bonus (2). For example, the upper limit of the payout number of the big bonus (1) may be set to be larger than the upper limit of the payout number of the big bonus (2).

  In addition, after being controlled by the big bonus (1), as an advantageous state, an AT (notifying the type of the selected small role (or the operating procedure of the stop buttons 12L, 12C, 12R for winning this) ( Assist Time may be controlled for a predetermined period (for example, for 100 games). In that case, whether or not to control to AT is determined when the big bonus (1) is won or after the big bonus (1) is controlled. In addition, the AT may be executed as a single advantageous state, separately from winning such as a big bonus. In such a case, whether or not to control to AT is determined separately from winning such as a big bonus, and in the case of controlling to AT, a predetermined number of games are executed after the determination is made. When controlled, it is controlled by the AT.

  When controlled by the AT in this way, the control is performed by the AT when a predetermined period (the number of games) has elapsed since the determination to be controlled by the AT has been made. In the predetermined period from when the control is performed to the AT (including the case where the control is not controlled by the AT), the CPU 121 of the effect control board 102a is controlled by the AT over a plurality of games. A predetermined effect such as an effect suggesting this is executed.

  In addition, after the big bonus (1) ends and after the big bonus (2) ends, any operation of the player becomes invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game cannot be progressed. Controlled for a certain period of time. When the big bonus (1) ends and the big bonus (2) ends when the stop function is enabled, any operation of the player is invalid except for the payment of credits. Thus, the control is performed until the second reset switch 93a is operated to a stop state where the progress of the game becomes impossible.

  The challenge bonus (1) is won when a combination of “BAR-4-Replay 1” is arranged on either the normal game state or the winning line in RT. The challenge bonus (2) is won when a combination of “1-2-1” is arranged on either the normal game state or the winning line in RT.

  As described for the combination of Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Challenge Bonus (1), and Challenge Bonus (2), each of the reels has a different symbol, so the bonus was won. It is difficult for the player to identify whether or not the bonus winning is made even more difficult for the player to notice.

  When the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2) is won, the gaming state shifts to the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2), respectively. There is a difference in the upper limit of the number of payout medals between the challenge bonus (1) and the challenge bonus (2).

  In the challenge bonus (1) and the challenge bonus (2), the challenge time (indicated as CT) where the end condition is satisfied by digesting one game until the challenge bonus (1) and the challenge bonus (2) are completed. However, it is repeatedly controlled for each game. While the game state is the challenge bonus (1) and the challenge bonus (2), a flag during the challenge bonus (1) and a flag during the challenge bonus (2) are set in the RAM 112, respectively. While the gaming state is at the challenge time, a flag during the challenge time is set in the RAM 112.

  The challenge bonus (1) ends when the end condition is satisfied when the number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 105. The game state is controlled by RT2 from the time that the challenge bonus (1) is won internally until the time when the selected challenge bonus (1) is won.

  In addition, after the challenge bonus (1) is finished, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a freeze state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. Also, when the challenge bonus (1) ends when the stop function is enabled, any operation of the player becomes invalid except for the payment of credits, and the progress of the game becomes impossible. The state is controlled until the second reset switch 93a is operated.

  On the other hand, the challenge bonus (2) ends when the end condition is satisfied when the number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 15. Therefore, the challenge bonus (2) is set so that the expected value of the number of games continuously controlled by the challenge bonus is 2 games since the number of payouts when the watermelon and the bell wins is 15. ing. Note that the expected value of the number of games continuously controlled by the challenge bonus is not limited to two games, and any value may be used as long as the expected value is a plurality of games.

  Even if the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the challenge bonus (1) are won in the internal lottery described later, the appropriate operation procedure is made so that the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R can be won in these roles. If you do not operate, you will not win these roles. This is because the symbols of the reel 3L constituting the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the challenge bonus (1) are not arranged within 7 frames on the reel 3L.

  On the other hand, when the bonus (2), cherry, bell, watermelon, and replay other than the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and challenge bonus (1) are won in the internal lottery described later, these roles are played. Since the constituent symbols are arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, it is possible to win regardless of the timing when the stop buttons 12L, 12C, 12R are operated.

  Cherry is awarded when the symbol “4” is derived on any winning line for the left reel 3L in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out per winning line. When “4” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel 3L, the derivation is made on four pay lines, so that a total of eight medals are paid out.

  The bell is awarded when the combination of “Replay 1-1-Replay 1” is aligned on any winning line in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  The watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Replay 1-4-4” is aligned on any winning line in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay 1-2-4” is aligned on either the winning line in the normal gaming state or RT. When winning a replay, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so three medals corresponding to the number of bets 3 that became unnecessary in the next game are paid out. This is essentially the same.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above winning combination (derivation of the winning display result) is permitted is determined before the display result of the variable display device 2a is derived and displayed (actually, when the start lever 11 is operated). ), To decide. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 115. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, according to the acquired random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the setting value set by the setting switch 91a It is done. Winning in the internal lottery is exclusive.

  Next, how the stage effects and the rank-up effects shown in the first to fourth embodiments are applied in the slot machine 200 will be described.

  In the slot machine 200, the liquid crystal display 4a has a corresponding relationship with the effect display device 9 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variable display device 2a has a first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Corresponding to 8b. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the starting condition for the variable display is a start prize, whereas in the slot machine 200, the starting condition for the variable display is an operation detection of the start lever 11. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the end condition for the variable display is that the variable display time has elapsed in the variable pattern, whereas in the slot machine 200, the end condition for the variable display is the stop buttons 12L, 12C, 12R operation detection.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variable display is performed according to the start winning prize, whereas in the slot machine 200, a game is displayed in which a variable display is performed according to the operation of the start lever 11 based on the insertion of medals. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, prize balls as prizes are paid out in accordance with winnings in various winning openings. In the slot machine 200, prizes according to the number of bets are given according to the game result. As a medal.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display result becomes the jackpot display result, it becomes an advantageous state advantageous for the advantaged person, whereas in the slot machine 200, if the winning symbols are arranged on any winning line. The winning combination includes a special combination, a small combination, a re-playing combination and the like that are advantageous for the player, and an advantageous state advantageous for the player is obtained. The slot machine 200 includes the AT described above as an advantageous state for the player.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot gaming state, the high probability state, the short time state, and the electric chew support control state are included in the advantageous state advantageous to the player, whereas in the slot machine 200, the bonus and An AT or the like is included in an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control microcomputer 100 that is mounted on the effect control board 80 and controls various effect means such as the effect display device 9 executes the stage effect and the rank-up effect described above. In the slot machine 200, the control unit 120a mounted on the effect control board 102a and controlling various effect means such as the liquid crystal display 4a can execute effects corresponding to the stage effect and the rank-up effect described above.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, a plurality of variable displays are executed from the timing (at the time of starting winning determination) before the variable display for a plurality of times is executed rather than the game that is the production target (notice target) is executed. As an example, a stage effect is shown as a pre-reading notice effect that provides an effect over a given period. On the other hand, in the slot machine 200, for example, it is suggested that the AT is controlled over a period in which a plurality of games are executed from the timing before the AT is executed (at the time of AT execution determination). A stage effect may be executed as an effect. For example, when it is determined to execute AT at the time of performing AT, it is possible to control to execute stage effects that shift from the normal stage to the special stage at a higher rate than when it is determined not to execute AT. That's fine.

  Then, when such a stage effect is executed in the slot machine 200, for example, the release (termination) of the special stage is limited until a predetermined number of games are executed. The special stage may be released (terminated) and controlled so as to shift to the normal stage in response to the operation means being operated. In the slot machine 200, a predetermined stop button (one or a plurality of stop buttons 12L, 12C, 12R) may be operated. Accordingly, the special stage may be canceled (terminated) and control may be performed to shift to the normal stage. Further, various operation means (MAXBET switch 46 and the like) other than the stop button provided in the slot machine 200 may be used as predetermined operation means. Further, an operation effect operating means such as the operation button 120 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided, and the operation effect operation means may be used as a predetermined operation means.

  If control for executing such stage effects is performed in the slot machine 200, the same effects as those obtained when executing the stage effects as described above in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be obtained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example in which a rank-up effect is executed as an effect suggesting whether or not the number of rounds that substantially obtain a prize ball is awarded in the big hit gaming state has been shown. On the other hand, in the slot machine 200, for example, it is possible to control the big bonus (1), (2), challenge bonus (1), (2) with different upper limit of the number of payouts. If it is controlled, it is then controlled to RT. When these bonuses are won, the rank-up effect as described above is executed.

  For example, the period until the number of payouts reaches the first stage under the control of any one of the big bonuses (1), (2) and the challenge bonus (1), and the big bonus (1) or (2) The rank-up effect as shown in the first to fourth embodiments may be executed in the period from the controlled stage until the number of payouts reaches the second stage from the first stage. More specifically, during the period until the number of payouts reaches the first stage, the first effect is executed until the predetermined number of games is reached, and the second effect is executed after the predetermined number of games is reached.

  In the case of the slot machine 200, there is no winning of a game ball like the pachinko gaming machine 1, so as a first effect, the payout appearance in which the level display of the level gauge 93 increases every time a medal is paid out. Should be done. Further, as the second effect, a game is performed using a predetermined stop button of the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R described above or various operation means (MAXBET switch 46, etc.) other than the stop button as the operation means. It is only necessary for the person to be able to operate and to execute a second effect (operation effect) similar to that performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the slot machine 200, when performing stage effects and rank-up effects as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, various control contents (including modifications) other than the control contents described above in the fifth embodiment. In the same way, what is shown in the first to fourth embodiments is also applicable to the slot machine 200 of the fifth embodiment.

  As a configuration unique to the slot machine 200, the following configuration may be adopted. As the first effect or the second effect of the rank-up effect described above, an effect in which the level display of the level gauge 93 increases in accordance with the increase in the number of games to be executed may be performed. Further, as the first effect or the second effect of the rank-up effect, an effect in which the level display of the level gauge 93 increases according to the type of the small role that has occurred may be performed. In addition, as the first effect or the second effect of the rank-up effect, an effect in which the level display color of the level gauge 93 changes according to the type of the small role that has occurred may be performed.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in S854 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, a special effect mode that is selected on the condition that the specific condition that it is determined to execute the prefetch notice based on the prefetch determination result is satisfied. Regarding the stage, when the player's intention to end is confirmed by the intention confirmation means such as the operation button 120 or the stop button 12L, the special stage being executed is terminated, so that the player can determine whether or not the special stage can be continued. This can reflect the will of the game and improve the fun of the game.

  (2) As shown in S858 of FIG. 36, S861 to S866 of FIG. 37, and S741 and S742 of FIG. 40, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed as the special stage effect, the end of ending the special stage being executed is ended. As for the conditions, even if the player's intention to end is confirmed, it is prohibited to be established during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game that may occur due to the game.

  (3) When confirming the player's intention according to the operation of the operation means such as the operation button 120 or the stop button 12L, the pre-reading notice effect canceling operation is performed as in the pre-reading notice effect canceling process in the second embodiment. In the enabled state, that is, in the state where the transition from the special stage according to the operation of the operation button 120 to the normal stage is possible, when the variation pattern in the variation display is the operable variation pattern, Since the process of stage transition in S864 to S866 is not executed, it is prohibited to end the special stage when a variation pattern that can be used by the operating means is selected. To prevent the special stage from being accidentally terminated by using the operation means when the termination is not intended It can be.

  (4) As shown in S858 of FIG. 36, S861 to S866 of FIG. 37, and S741 and S74 of FIG. 40, the establishment of the condition for terminating the special stage until the predetermined number of variable displays is executed is prohibited. In this case, as shown in the third embodiment, until a predetermined number of times (five times) of variable display in which the selection ratios of the special effects differ between the first selection table and the second selection table are executed, Since the selection ratio of special effects that display multiple types of special character images will be different after the variable display is executed, special depending on whether the end condition of the special stage being executed is satisfied Since the selection ratio of the production is different, the interest of the game can be improved by the selection ratio of the special production.

  (5) When executing the variable display, it is determined whether or not the stage transition advance notice is executed in S873 of FIG. 39, whether the result of the change display is a big hit or not, and in S875, the pre-read notice cancellation is permitted. As a result, it is determined that the end condition of the special stage being executed is determined to be a jackpot display result, so when the end condition of the special stage being executed occurs, the big hit game state is entered. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  (6) The game history stored in the game history storage area in the RAM of the effect control board 80 and output in S2001 of FIG. 47 is set to be executable only on the special stage as in the special stage character display information of FIG. Since the information on whether or not the effect is performed is included, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the special stage.

  (7) The game history accumulated in the game history accumulation area in the RAM of the effect control board 80 and output in S2001 in FIG. 47 is more normal in the special stage as in the super-reach special character display information in FIG. Since it includes information on whether or not an effect that is set to be executed more easily than the stage is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the special stage.

  (8) Derivation operation means such as the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R in FIG. 49 are provided that allow the player to perform a derivation operation for deriving and displaying the display results on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in FIG. In such a case, the player's intention is confirmed in accordance with the operation of the derivation operation means with respect to the special stage being executed. It is possible to simplify the player's intention confirmation operation as the end condition of the special stage.

  (9) As shown in FIGS. 41A to 41C, the second effect (operation effect) is performed as the final effect on the rank-up effect (S976 to S979 in FIG. 45). Since the second effect is performed from the state based on the changed effect state (S972 to S975 in FIG. 45) due to the first effect (winning effect, payout appearance) performed before that, the final effect on the rank-up effect is As for the game at the timing before the execution timing, it is possible to make the player feel to be involved in the possibility of whether or not a round is further given, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (10) In S973 of FIG. 45, the number of game balls won as the game value in the first effect (winning effect, payout appearance) so as to limit the effect so that the level gauge value does not exceed the first upper limit value. Since the change in the production state is limited based on the number of medals paid out, the change in the production state in the second production (operation production) is affected by the excessive change in the production state in the first production. Can not be.

  (11) As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, in the first effect (winning effect, payout appearance), there is a high possibility that an advantageous state is further given according to the change state of the effect state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved based on the change state of the production state in the first production.

  (12) For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the operation button 120 is operated during the operation effect execution round according to S983 to S985 in FIG. 45, the round effect A is executed in the subsequent rounds, and the operation effect is executed. When the button operation is not performed during the round, as shown in the round effect B in the subsequent rounds, in the second effect (operation effect), the advantageous state is changed according to the change state of the effect state. Furthermore, since the effect mode in the advantageous state after being given is different, the interest of the game can be improved based on the change state of the effect state in the second effect.

  (13) When the cumulative amount of the change in the production state in the advantageous state reaches the first upper limit, as in the message notification of “the wall is destroyed and ranked up at the maximum level” in FIG. Further, when an effect is given to notify that the possibility of being given is advantageous for the player, the level gauge value is set to the first upper limit value (in accordance with the number of winning or paying out as shown in FIG. 41B). 40), the first effect (winning effect, payout appearance) is performed so that the player is involved in the effect of notifying the player that there is a possibility that the advantageous state is further provided. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in 1st Embodiment, the example which performs a prize production | presentation as a 1st production of the rank improvement production of the pachinko machine 1 was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the first effect of the rank-up effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a level increase effect of the level gauge 93 may be executed according to the number of game balls paid out during the round.

  In the fifth embodiment, an example in which a rank-up effect of the slot machine 200 is executed when a bonus is won is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rank-up effect may be executed when winning in another advantageous state such as AT.

  In the first to fifth embodiments described above, in the rank-up effect, it is a condition that it is determined that the predetermined timing has been reached on the effect control side as an opportunity to switch from the first effect to the second effect. An example was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the rank-up effect, as an opportunity to switch from the first effect to the second effect, the operation means such as the operation button 120 or the stop button 12L is operated (for example, switching of the effect is desired) In such a case, the player may confirm the player's intention, for example, by performing a display requesting the operation of the operation operation means and performing an effect of accepting the operation.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the player confirms whether or not to end the special stage, the first button (for example, the stop button 12L) among the stop buttons 12L, 12C, and 12R in FIG. ) May be used as the operation means for specifying the end intention, and the first button (for example, the stop button 12R) may be used as the operation means for specifying the continuation intention.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the embodiment described above, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, which are two special symbol displays, are provided, and the two special symbols are variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one special symbol display is provided instead of two special symbol displays, and one special symbol is variably displayed. In the case of adopting such a configuration, the special symbol change display on the special symbol display is executed in accordance with each of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14. You can do so. In other words, various controls for causing the first special symbol display 8a to execute the first special symbol based on the winning of the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol display based on the winning of the second starting winning port 14. The various controls for causing the second special symbol to be executed by the device 8b may be applied to the variation display of the special symbol in one special symbol display.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. (Sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (4) The embodiments described above are not limited to payout-type gaming machines that pay out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of winning balls, but respond to detection of winning balls by enclosing game balls. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives points.

  (5) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (6) For the 5th to 7th rounds of 16R probability variation big hits B and C, a winning effect different from the winning effect of the first to third rounds is executed as the first effect of the rank-up effect. Also good.

  (7) In each of the 16R probability variation big hits A to C, the operation effect may be executed as the first effect of the rank-up effect, and the operation effect may be executed as the second effect of the rank-up effect.

  (8) For the first to third rounds of 16R probability variation big hits A to C, a winning effect is executed as the first effect of rank up production, and the 4th to 16th rank up of 16R probability variation big hit A and 16R probability variation big hit B For the fourth round of C, C, the operation effect is executed as the second effect of the rank-up effect, and for the fifth to seventh rounds of 16R probability variation big hits B, C, the operation effect is performed as the first effect of the rank-up effect. The winning effect may be executed as the second effect of the rank-up effect for the 4th to 16th rounds of the 16R probability variation big hit A and the fourth round of the 16R probability variation big hits B and C.

  (9) For the first to third rounds of 16R probability variation jackpots A to C, the operation effect is executed as the first effect of the rank-up effect, and the fourth to sixteenth rounds of 16R probability variation jackpot A and the 16R probability variation jackpot B, For the 4th round of C, the prize-winning effect is executed as the second effect of the rank-up effect, and for the 5th to 7th rounds of the 16R probability variation big hits B and C, the winning effect is executed as the first effect of the rank-up effect. And about the 4th-16th round of 16R probability variation big hit A and the 4th round of 16R probability variation big hit B, C, you may make it perform an operation effect as a 2nd effect of a rank improvement effect.

  (10) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 560 Game control microcomputer, 100 Production control microcomputer, 93 Level gauge, 92 Wall, 938a First special symbol display, 8b Second special symbol display, 9 Production display device, 120 Operation buttons .

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a predetermined game,
State control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage for a player according to establishment of a predetermined condition;
In the advantageous state, including a first effect and a second effect that is executed after the first effect, an advantage that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is further given after the execution And directing means for performing a state giving notification effect,
The production means is
First effect means for performing the first effect by changing the effect state according to a change in the magnitude of the game value obtained in the advantageous state;
And a second effect means for performing the second effect by changing the effect state under a condition different from the first effect from a state based on the effect state changed by the first effect. A gaming machine.

Images